II-B.Tech

STUDENT HANDBOOK A.Y.2017-18/I SEM

Department of IT

MARRI LAXMAN REDDY INSTITUTIONS

MLR Institute of Technology

Dundigal (V), Quthbullapur (M), R.R Dist,

Hyderabad – 500043, A.P

www.mlrinstitutions.ac.in

VISION

STATEMENT VISION STATEMENT OF MLRIT

To create and nurture competent Engineers and managers who would be enterprise

leaders in all parts of the world with aims of reaching the skies and touching the stars and

yet feet firmly planted on the ground – good human beings steeped in ethical and moral

values.

MISSION

STATEMENT

MISSION STATEMENT OF MLRIT

MLR Institute of Technology is committed to providing a positive, professional and

conducive learning environment where all students are inspired to achieve their

potential and strive for excellence in a global society as dignified professionals

with the cooperation of all stakeholders.

GOALS

OF MLRIT GOALS OF MLRIT

Goals of Engineering education at undergraduate / graduate level:

Equip students with industry – accepted career and life skills

To create a knowledge warehouse for students

To disseminate information on skills and competencies that are in use and in demand

by the industry

To create learning environment where the campus culture acts as a catalyst to student

fraternity to understand their core competencies, enhance their competencies and

improve their career prospects.

To provide base for lifelong learning and professional development in support of

evolving career objectives, which include being informed, effective, and responsible

participants within the engineering profession and in society.

To prepare students for graduate study in Engineering and Technology.

To prepare graduates to engineering practice by learining from professional

engineering assignments.

VISION STATEMENT OF DEPARTMENT

“To build IT Department with commitment towards continuous improvement that

adapts swiftly to 21st century challenges by developing professionals with robust

technical and research backgrounds”.

MISSION STATEMENT OF DEPARTMENT

To provide quality Teaching Learning environment and make students

proficient in both theoretical and applied foundations of Information

Technology.

Create highly skilled IT engineers, capable of doing research and also

develop solutions for the betterment of the nation.

Instill professional and ethical values among students.

To develop entrepreneurial skills in students and also motivate them towards

pursuing higher studies.

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

PEO I Be successfully employed as a Software Engineer in the field of Information

Technology.

PEO II Be a successful entrepreneur and assume leadership position, responsibility

within an organization.

PEO III Progress through advanced degree or certificate programs in engineering,

business, and other professionally related fields.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO1 An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematics, science, and

engineering fundamentals appropriate to the discipline.

PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems reaching

substantiated conclusions using principles of mathematics and engineering

sciences.

PO3 An ability to design and develop solutions for IT Problems to meet desired

needs within pragmatic constraints such as economic, environmental, political,

manufacturability, and sustainability.

PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge

and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and

interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid

conclusions.

PO5 An ability to use and apply modern technical concepts, tools and practices in the

core Information Technologies.

PO6 An ability to analyze the local and global impact of computing on individuals,

organizations, and society.

PO7 An ability to effectively integrate IT-based solutions into the user environment

constantly.

PO8 An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and social issues and

responsibilities.

PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse

teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

PO10 Ability to communicate effectively with all stake holders.

PO11 Apply Project Management skills and knowledge in Practice as a team

member/leader to manage projects.

PO12 Recognition of the need for and the ability to engage in Life Long Learning.

Our Pioneers…

MARRI LAXMAN REDDY – CHAIRMAN

Sri Marri Laxman Reddy, the founder Chairman of MLR Institutions has

been in the field of education for the last 22 years with the aim of

spreading quality education among children at the school & college

levels. MLR Institute of Technology is the culmination of his dreams. He

is also founder chairman of Marri Laxman Reddy Institute of Technology

& Management, MLR Institute of Pharmacy, St. Martin’s Engineering

College and St. Martins Schools at Balanagar, Chintal and Malkajgiri. He

is a veteran athlete of international repute.

MARRI RAJASEKHAR REDDY – SECRETARY

Sri Marri Rajashekar Reddy, the Secretary of MLR Institutions has

the distinction of establishing the Institute of Aeronautical

Engineering, MLR Institute of Technology, MLR Institute of

Pharmacy, Vardhaman Engineering College, Vidyanjali Grammar

School at L.B.Nagar and Institute of Aircraft Maintenance

Engineering, approved by DGCA. He is also Treasurer of Indo-US

Collaboration for Engineering Education of A.P. Chapter.

Mr. M. Rajasekhar Reddy, a person with remarkable abilities and

great acumen and a dynamic leader. He is known to be the dynamic mentor of MLR

Institute of Technology who is always on the sprit to take the institute to newer levels in

every aspect of an \"Ideal Institution\" and strives hard to make every dream a reality.

He likes his father Mr. M. Laxman Reddy, who has a credit of establishing Institute of

Aeronautical Engineering adding a new flavor to St. Martins group of Institutions and

Vidyanjali Grammar School. His ability to turn adversities into opportunities is

unquestionable. The Secretary has a vision of establishing MLR Institute of Technology

as a brand. He strives hard to initiate various industry oriented programs for the benefit of

the students and he envisions his students to be present at the top most position in the

industry

Dr. P. BHASKARA REDDY – DIRECTOR

Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy, B.E.(ECE), M.Tech., Ph.D., F.I.S.E.E., MCSI, MISTE,

MIETE,MEMCE. the Director of MLR Institute of Technology, is a young

and dynamic Professor of ECE, has 26 years of Industry,Teaching,

Research and Administrative experience in Reputed Engineering

Colleges.

In 24 years of experience served various positions from Asst.Professor

to Principal. Research & Guidance: Published 1 Book (International

Edition) "Information Technology in Technical Education - Economic

Development by "LAMBERT Academic Publishing" Publishied 9 Laboratry Manuals, 84

Research papers at National and International Level on Education, Electronics

Communication, I.T, Computer Networks, E-Commerce etc. Guided 5 Reserach Scholars

for their Doctorates, about 50 M.Tech., M.C.A and B.Tech projects. Symposiums

Conducted: 11 National Level Technical Symposiums on various topics in Electronics &

Communications, Computers etc.

Awards Received: 1) Bharath Jyothi Award in 2003 from IIFS, New Delhi, 2)

Rastraprathiba Award in 2004 from ICSEP, New Delhi, 3) Knowledge Award from Alumni

of SVHCE for the year 2001.

MLR Institute of Technology Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.

Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166

1.GENERAL INFORMATION

ABOUT THE COLLEGE

1.0 BEAUTIFUL CAMPUS:

Set in Sylvan surroundings away from the hustle & bustle of city life yet only 4 km away

from Mahindra Satyam Technology Park on Balanagar – Narsapur state highway, the

Institute is extremely conducive to academic, co-curricular and extra-curricular activities. It

has large and well ventilated buildings with modern equipment in place and “State of the

art”, sports facilities.

HIGHLIGHTS:

1.1 AUTONOMOUS STATUS

MLR Institute of Technology is now an Autonomous Institution!!

Under the UGC Autonomous College Scheme for a period of Six Years

1.2 PERFORMANCE

The college has been AA rated under colleges in AP by Careers360 magazine. Also, the

college has been ranked at 126 by the week magazine in the Best colleges Survey-2013.

1.3 FACULTY:

The College is proud to have the best faculty, a blend of experienced and academics with

eminent academicians team IIT’s, NIT’s and other reputed organizations teaching at the

Institute that makes MLRIT as one of the best Institute pursue B.Tech, M.Tech,MCA and

MBA as one of the under JNTU Hyderabad. The faculty is constantly encouraged to

upgrade their qualifications and a number of them have enrolled for Ph.D. Most of the

faculty members have been empowered with High Impact teaching under Wipro Mission

10X program.

1.4 INFRASTRUCTURES:

Spacious campus and natural surroundings with plenty of greenery

College Transport facilities from twin cities for students and staff from all corners of the

city

Air Conditioned auditorium for organizing events, workshops and seminars

Good Canteen facility

HDFC Bank ATM in the campus

Fully equipped Laboratories with the state-of-art equipments

1.5 LABORATORIES:

The Institute has State of the art laboratories with 1000 plus Branded Systems equipped

with latest hardware and software with online testing facility catering to the needs of CSE,

IT. The Institute also has well equipped Electronic Labs, Aeronautical Engineering Labs

and Workshops for ECE and Aeronautical Engineering Students. The college has recently

established Microsoft, IBM for CSE/IT cadence lab for VLSI design and CATIA

Aeronautical Design Lab.

1.6 CAT Centre:

The Institute is an Authorized IIM Cat Centre, which will conduct tests all through the year

as per the IIM schedule.

1.7 ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:

The Institute has established Ultramodern Computerized English language Laboratory with

60 plus Computer Systems loaded with latest Software to enhance the Softskills of

Students to make the Students Industry ready.

The Library also have the previous University Exam Question papers and previous project

reports from all the departments. The library contains recorded lectures of all IIT

professors from NPTEL.

1.8 R&D Cell:

The Institute has an R&D Cell under the Chairmanship of ?. The R&D cell undertakes

externally funded R&D projects from agencies like AICTE, DST, UGC and other similar

state, private and society / trust bodies. It also undertakes research publications and

interactions of faculty members with outside world.

1.9 LIBRARY:

The Institute Library has over 29000 books and 244 National and International journals

and 15 Magazines that are required to all branches of Engineering. The Institute has the

unique distinction of becoming Member of DELNET, Infotrac engineering online journals

that connects more than 700 libraries in Asia Pacific Region. The Library has 35

Computers with 10 MB PS, Internet Facility that makes our knowledge Savvy Students to

be technically competent on par with Industry professionals. NPTEL Videos and e-books,

MIT courses also available.

1.10 National Programme on Technology Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)

The main objective of NPTEL program is to enhance the quality of engineering education

in the country by developing curriculum based video and web courses. This is being

carried out by seven IITs and IISc Bangalore as a collaborative project. In the first phase of

the project, supplementary content for 129 web courses in engineering / science and

humanities have been developed. Each course contains materials that can be covered in

depth in 60 or more lecture hours. In addition, 110 courses have been developed in video

format, with each course comprising of approximately 60 or more one-hour lectures. In the

next phase other premier institutions are also likely to participate in content creation.

1.11 Co-Curricular Activities:

The Institution organizes Local Industrial Visits to Organizations like DOORDARSHAN,

BSNL, and to Student Conferences like HYSEA,Student Conference at INFOSYS,

Gachibowli Campus, and Government Sponsored Summits like INDO SOFT IT Summit

at Hitex City Convention Centre to Interface with the Industry for Career Planning and to

make them Industry Ready. The Institute focuses on Techno Management Events like

Technonium and Zavtra to enhance the Technical Skills and Soft Skills to make them

Employable.

1.12 Professional Bodies:

MLR Institute of Technology has the unique distinction of becoming Institutional Member

in Professional bodies such as Confederation of Indian Industry (CII), Aeronautical

Society of India (AeSI), Computer Society of India (CSI), Institute of Electronics and

Telecommunication Engineering (IETE), Indian Society of Technical Education (ISTE),

ELIAP and Hyderabad Management Association.(HMA)

1.13 Extra-Curricular Activities:

MLRIT has State of the art facilities like Olympic Style Basketball Court, Volleyball

Court, Gymnasium, Indoor Stadium, Cricket Stadium with Lush Green Outfields and

400 meter excellent track for Athletic meet. MLR Institute of Technology has been

regularly conducting JNTU Zonal Games and Annual Open Invitational Volleyball,

Football, Cricket Tournaments.

The Institute also organizes various Cultural Events like Traditional Day for freshers,

“ZAVTRA” A National Level Technical Fest, TRISHNA - The Annual Day Celebrations,

ECSTASY – A Cultural Nite by Vishal & Shekhar, Indian Idol Sri Ram, Farewell Party

for final year students, Alumni Meet for Ex. Students and Graduation Day for

graduated students every year to imbibe a spirit of Oneness.

NSS Activities:

A Sense of social responsibility is inculcated in Young Minds by organizing Plantation

Programmes, Health Awareness Camps, Blood Donation Camps, Flood Relief Camps,

Distribution of Books to School Children under Digital Literacy Programme of Microsoft

by MLRIT NSS Volunteers.

1.14 In House Projects:

The students are taking part in International Project competitions hosted by major MNCs,

like IBM, Microsoft and Infosys. The Great Mind Challenge hosted by IBM, Microsoft

Imagine Cup and project work as part of foundation programme conducted under the

aegis of Infosys are some of the important projects presently being undertaken by the

students of MLRIT. Further, the students are encouraged to do In House Projects under

the supervision of expect faculty members.In addition,students are encouraged to give

innovative ideas and do projects under the aegis of Microsoft academic innovative

alliance.

1.15 MOUs:

BOEING

Tech Mahindra

Infotech Enterprises Ltd.

IBM

Oracle

Sun Microsystems

Infosys

CA Labs

Tata Advanced Systems

Microsoft

Globarena

Wipro

IUCEE

For giving special training programmes to engineering students and Faculty members of

the institute

1.16 Student Achievements:

Our College students got 2nd

Place out of 2100 colleges in E-Plus Challenge 14

conducted by The Hindu in Hyderabad in March 2014.

MLR Institute of Technology students have been securing JNTUH ranks regularly right

from 1st batch itself, reflecting the core competencies of the faculty and dedicated efforts

of the students.

Mr Venkata Rama Varma student of 3rd

year Aero has participated and stood 3rd

in

National Aero-Modeling competition conducted by Boeing held during Techfest 2014 at

IIT Madras.

Mr. Venkata Rama Varma student of 3rd

year Aero has participated and stood 3rd

in

Avion-E and Hower Mania held during Techfest 2013 at NIT Warangal.

Mr Venkata Rama Varma and NAM Sai Teja students of 3rd

year Aero have been

selected for Boeing National Aeromodeling Competition which will be held at IIT Delhi

next Month.

Mr. Venkata Rama Varma student of 3rd

year Aero has participated and stood 1st in

Aero-Modeling Competition held during Techfest 2013 at Christ University

Mr Venkata Rama Varma student of 3rd

year Aero has participated and stood 3rd

in Blitz

Krieg Design Challenge held during Techfest 2013 at IIT BOMBAY.

Mr.Varma and team III-Aeronautical students got 2nd

Prize in ICRAMAV-2013

organized by JNTUH for their MAV (Micro Aerial Vehicle).

Mr.Eshwer Reddy student of 4th year Aero has participated and stood 2

nd Prize in

Working Models competition organized by Rotary Club.

Three of 2nd

Aero students got Rs. 5000/- cash prize in Design Competition organized

Engineers CAD Centre Hyderabad

1.17 Alumni Outreach

The Institute has Alumni Association under the name and Style of MLR Alumni

Association and conducted the First Alumni Meet on 14th Feb 2009 with the first batch 0f

2008 passed out MBA students attending the meet.

The Association has honoured the 2009 batch B.Tech, MCA along with MBA students

by conducting the Second Alumni Meet at hotel Blue Fox on 13th March 2010 where

more than 200 students participated in the Meet.

The Association conducted 3rd

Alumni meet for 2010 batch B.Tech, MCA & MBA

students on 16th April 2011 at our college Auditorium.

The Association conducted 4th Alumni meet for 2011 batch B.Tech, MCA & MBA

students on 14th July 2012 at our college Auditorium.

The Association conducted 5th Alumni meet for 2012 batch B.Tech & MBA students on

11th May 2013 at our college Auditorium.

The Association conducted 6th Alumni meet for 2013 batch B.Tech, M.Tech & MBA

students on 14th Feb 2015 at our college Auditorium.

1.18 Contact Information

Principal - Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy - 9866678599

Dean (CS) - Prof. K. L. Chugh - 9866666601

Department Head CSE - Mr.G.Kiran Kumar - 9440759766

Department Head IT - Dr.K.Srinivas Rao - 9959656448

Department Head ECE - Mr. S.V.S Prasad - 9440840483

Department Head AERO - Dr.M.Satyanarayana Gupta - 9848339384

Department Head MECH - Dr.S.Madhu - 9160404635

Department Head MBA - Mrs.Suneetha - 9160404639

Department Head H&S - Dr. V. Radhika Devi - 9848472797

Sr.Administrative Officer - Mr.G.Prabhakar Reddy - 9866675818

2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES

MLR Institute of Technology has a unique distinction of placing their First Batch of B.Tech

Students in their prefinal year of Study and MBA Students in Multi National Companies. The

Institute has so far interacted with more than 69 Companies and 233 Selections from

B.Tech/MCA and MBA Programmes have taken Place.

In this direction Apart from the Placements the Institute has arranged Summer Internship

Programmes with Companies like Computer Amociates, Mind Tree M/s Infotech Enterprises Ltd,

Mahindra Finance, Max New York Life Insurance, Nokia Ltd , Mahindra Finance, Bajaj Capital

Ltd, Reliance Money and Tata AIG for Engineering and MBA Students to develop Mentor

Relationships and to get to know about the Work Culture and gain Competencies to make them

Industry Ready during their Study period.

The Institute has arranged Campus Recruitment drives Infosy, Mind Tree Ltd, Oracle, ADP,

Mahindra Satyam, Infotech Enterprises Ltd, Keane India Ltd (NTT), IBM Technologies Pvt Ltd,

Tata Advanced Systems, IBM, Syntel Inc, Tech-Synergy Pvt Ltd, Adithya Software Solutions,

HDFC Bank Ltd, Medha Servo drives. NR Radio & Switches Pvt.Ltd. OsiTechnologies Ltd,

Genpact, Reliance Money, Nagarjuna Caments Ltd & Oasis Software Informatics, Shoppers

Shop, Trident Micro Systems India, SnapDeal.com, India Mart Ltd, Power Tech, Suchir India,

Quartz Infra and Engineering Pvt Ltd, Gobrah Technologies Pvt Ltd, Elbit Diagnostics, Eprism

Solutions, Geo Meme Strategic Consulting, India Info Line, Water Shed project of Govt of AP,

Ocean Ship Maritime etc.

The CSE students visited Infosys Infosys for the SPARK Programme which is an orientation

programme on Information Technology Space.

2.1 Industry Grade Skills required for Employment

Behavioral and Communication Skills are recognized as important elements in professional

development of an Engineer including English for specific purposes. Employers give

considerable value to these diverse set of skills at the time of interviews.

In addition to course curriculum, every student will gain the following skills during the study

period:

Analytical and Problem solving skills

Subject – specific knowledge

Research and improved decision making abilities

Oral communication skills

Managerial skills

Understanding of other cultures

Confidence and competence to work in International environment

As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and exhibiting the

leadership skills should start from the first year of engineering. Every student is advised to read

/ practice from the following books;

Verbal and Nonverbal by RS Agarwal

Baron GRE

Wren and Martin English Grammer Book

2.2 Important criteria of Employment

In addition to the industry grade skills required for employment, the most important criteria for

employment is that the student should get a minimum of 60% in academics with no backlogs to

make them eligible for campus recruitments. In the recent past, many companies stipulated a

cut of 68% for attending the interview / writing the test. Every student should Endeavour to

achieve a minimum of 68% with no backlogs to make them suitable for picking up by good

companies.

Job Portals:

1. www.freshersworld.com

2. www.monster.com

3. www.naukri.com

2.3 Higher Studies

M.Tech

The Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering (GATE) is an all-India examination administered

and conducted in eight zones across the country by the GATE Committee comprising faculty

from Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and seven Indian Institutes of Technology on

behalf of the National Coordinating Board - GATE, Department of Education, Ministry of

Human Resources Development (MHRD), and Government of India.

Objective

To identify meritorious and motivated candidates for admission to Post Graduate

Programmes in

Engineering, Technology, Architecture and Pharmacy at the National level. To serve as

benchmark for normalization of the Undergraduate Engineering Education in the country.

This provides an opportunity for advanced engineering education in India. An M.E or M.Tech

degree is a desirable qualification for our young engineers seeking a rewarding professional

career. Engineering students, while in the final year of their degree course, spend

considerable time in seeking an opening for studies in foreign universities.

The students are advised to pursue M.Tech in IIT’s/NIT’s/University Colleges.

MBA

Earning a Master’s of Business Administration (MBA) degree can provide you with

management skills and business expertise that open new career opportunities to you. An

MBA program will also launch you into the much higher pay range that upper level managers

and executives enjoy. Furthermore, in the high-level positions, an MBA degree will allow you

to hold and your work will often be more interesting and rewarding.

The students are advised to pursue M.BA in IIM’s/XLRI/Reputed Business Schools.

Higher Studies Abroad

TOEFL is mandatory for seeking admission in any academic course at any level-

undergraduate, graduate or post graduate, in USA and Canada. Similarly UK Universities ask

for IELTS for seeking admission to graduate and past graduate courses.

GRE The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered by the Educational Testing

Services (ETS) for admission into all graduate academic programs (except management) in

universities across USA and Canada and some selected universities across the world

including India. The exam is a Computer Adaptive Test and is administered at any of the

Sylvan testing centers in the country after prior registration.

The GMAT is a Computer Adaptive Test administered online by Educational Testing Services

(ETS) through Sylvan testing centers located in all the major cities in India. Those who wish to

enroll for courses in Business Management in American universities have to take the GMAT

test and submit their scores to the department.

2.4 Various Scholarships Available In India

Bharat Petroleum Scholarship For Higher Studies | Balarama Digest Scholarship | Central

Institute of Indian Languages | Fair & Lovely Foundation - Project Saraswati Scholarships |

Government Of India Office of the Director General of Civil Aviation Scholarship | Homi

Bhabha Centre For Science Education Tata Institute of Fundamental Research Research

Scholarships | HSBC Scholarships | Indian Council Of Agricultural Research Award Of

National Talent Scholarship In Agriculture | Indian Institute Of Geomagnetism Research

Scholars | Invention Awards For School Children | Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL) -

Scholarships | Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund Jawaharlal Nehru Scholarships For Doctoral

Studies | Junior Research Scholarships For Cancer Biology Tata Memorial Centre & Tata

Memorial Hospital | Jaigopal Garodia Vivekananda Trust Scholarships | Lalit Kala Akademi -

Scholarship | Mahindra All India Talent Scholarships For Diploma courses In Polytechnics |

National Brain Research Centre Scholarships | NTPC Scholarships | National Institute Of

Science Communication And Information Resources(NISCAIR) | National Board For Higher

Mathematics(NBHM) | National Thermal Power Corporation Ltd.Scholarships | National

Olympiad Programme | National Level Science Talent Search Examination - 2005 | Narotam

Sekhsaria Scholarship Programme | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships, Post

Doctoral Fellowships | National Aptitude Test | NIIT National IT Aptitude Test | Oil And Natural

Gas Corporation Ltd (ONGC) Scholarships To SC/ST Students | Office Of The Director

General of Civil Aviation Scholarships Stipend to the SC/ST Candidates | Rashtriya Sanskrit

Sansthan - Scholarships | Scholarships To Young Artistes | Saf-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship

| Sports Authority Of India - Sports Scholarships | SAF-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Spic

Macay Scholarships | The Childrens Foundation - Scholarships | The L&T Build-India

Scholarship | The Hindu-Hitachi Scholarships | The Paul Foundation Scholarships |

Technology Information Forecsting and Assessment Council(TIFAC) Women Scientist

Scholarship Scheme | The Young Talent IT Scholarship The Dr.GB Scholarships Foundation |

2.5 Various International Scholarships Available In India

A * STAR India Youth Scholarship | A.M.M. Arunachalam-Lakshmi Achi Scholarship For

Overseas Study | British Chevening Scholarships | Bharat Petroleum - Scholarships for Higher

Studies | Cambridge Nehru Scholarships | Commonwealth Scholarship and Fellowship | Czech

Government Scholarship | Chevening Technology Enterprise Scholarship Programme |

Chinese Government Scholarship | Greek Government Scholarships | Israel Government

Scholarship | Iranian Government Scholarship | Offer of Italian Government Scholarship |

Japanese Government Scholarships | K.C.Mahindra Scholarships For Post-Graduate Studies

Abroad | Lady Meherbai D.Tata Scholarships | Mexican Government Scholarship | Norwegian

Government Scholarships | National Overseas Scholarships/Passage Grant for ST Candidates

| Portuguese Government Scholarships | Sophia Merit Scholarships Inc | Slovak Government

Scholarship | SIA Youth Scholarships | The Rhodes Scholarships India | The Ramakrishna

Mission Institute Of Culture Award of Debesh-Kamal Scholarships For Studies Abroad | The

Inlaks Foundation - Scholarships |

Website for Higher Studies:

1. www.higherstudyabroad.org

2. www.highereducationinindia.com

3. STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION

COURSES

As per the career plan for students of MLR Institute of Technology with a view to bridge the gap

between Industry and Academia, it has been planned to equip every student with at least three

International / National certification by the time he / she completes the course of study. The details

of the certification courses are given below:

Branch

Year Name of the Certification Course

Computer Science and

Engineering / IT / MCA

2nd

Year Certificate Information Technology

3rd

Year IBM Certified DB2 Database Associate,

Infosys Campus Connect

4th Year

IBM Certified Rational Application

Developer

4th Year SUN Certified Java Programmer

Electronics and

Communication Engineering

2nd

Year Institute of Electronics and

Telecommunication Engineering

3rd

Year Motorola @ CAMPUS

4th Year IBM Certified DB2 Database Associate

Aeronautical Engineering

2nd

Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd

Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th Year Certificate in CATIA

Mechanical Engineering

2nd

Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd

Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th Year Certificate in CATIA

3.1 Help Desk

The college has set up a Help Desk for Career Guidance and overseas education. The aim of

the Help Desk is to provide a flatform for the students to choose the Right Destination. The

students can reach the Help Desk in person or through mail at email id

helpdesk@mlrinstitutions.ac.in

4. PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE

4.1 Student Feedback

In case the students find it difficult to cope up / understand a particular subject, they are

advised to discuss it with

a. The Concerned Teacher

b. The Class Teacher

c. The Department Head

d. The Principal

Students can use the suggestion boxes for communicating feedback. Students should

mention their names so that they can be informed of the progress / more details /

clarifications can be obtained.

4.2 Class Teacher

Every class is assigned a Class Teacher (a faculty member). Students can directly discuss

their college related or personal problems related to studies with them. The Class Teachers

are accessible to the students and they can talk to the Class Teacher or whenever they are

free from class / lab work. Class Teacher will meet with the class representative on daily

basis to discuss their day-to-day difficulties if any.

4.3 Class Representatives and their roles

Two students from each class are selected as the Class Representatives from the

department basing on their academic performance and discipline. Department Head makes

the selections.

Responsibilities of the Class Representatives:

Collection of MIS format from Class Teacher daily.

Communicating the departmental / college directives & information to the

students.

Collecting the feedback of difficulties faced by the students and communicating

Suggestions for improvements.

Coordinating academic events and co-curricular activities.

Encourage students to interact for better studies, sharing books and notes.

Compilation and submission of MIS form to class teacher at the end of the

period.

4.4 Performance Counseling

Mentors will evaluate the student individually for the following:

a. Less marks in internal exams

b. Continuous absence (3 days) and shortage of attendance

c. Not understanding the subject

d. Students from Telugu medium

e. Assistance for back log subjects etc.

f. Communication with parents

g. Provide help to back log students

4.5 Remedial Classes / Tutorial / Revisions

Remedial Classes are conducted for students who are weak and who do not perform well in

their internal examinations / class tests or for the students who want extra help. Slots in the

time table have been reserved for Tutorial where in the students are helped to solve the

question in the class itself.

4.6 Backlog Management

The Mentors maintain a complete record of Examination results of each student and they

counsel and guide them in preparing for backlogs. Students are provided with material and

important questions are discussed.

4.7 Correspondence with parents

Parents will be informed about the performance of their ward from time to time in the

semester. However, parents are requested to be in touch with the Student mentor /

Department Head on a regular basis. Further, parents are sent sms on daily bases if their

wards do not attend the college.

5. RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS

5.1 Administrative:

1. Students, admitted into this College, are deemed to have agreed to the rules and

regulations of the college, as laid down by the College Authorities from time to time, and

the rules lay down in this leaflet, issued at the time of admission.

2. Students should inform any changes in the addresses/Phone No. of their parents /

guardians to the college office.

3. The college shall communicate to the parents \ guardians of the students from time to

time regarding the regularity and performance in the examinations of their wards. The

case of serious indiscipline on the part of the students (s) may also be communicated to

parent (s) \ guardian (s).

5.2. Academic:

1. Students should attend the classes in - time. Late- comers shall not be permitted to

enter the class room and they are likely to loose the attendance.

2. Students are expected to be regular to the classes. The students Shall not absent

themselves for classes without prior approval. Prior permission shall be taken from

concerned counselor and submitted to the Head of the Department.

3. In case of ill-health, the student should submit the medical certificate along with

prescription, etc., from a registered medical doctor. The student should get the

medical certificate within two days from the date of reporting to the college after iII

health and also produce a letter from Father/ Mother regarding ill-health. Permission

on medical grounds shall not be granted for one or two days.

4. The students should come to the laboratories with the prescribed uniform.

5. If a student disturbs the class or makes mischief, he / she will be marked absent and

may be expelled from the class.

6. Students shall spend their leisure time in the library/computer center.

7. Students are expected to put up the minimum aggregate percentage of attendance

(75%) as laid down by the JNT University. Students, falling short of 75% of attendance

shall not be promoted to the next Semester \ Class.

8. Parents \ guardians of the students can contact the college authorities either in person

or by post regarding discipline, regularity in attending classes, performance in the

examinations, etc., of their wards.

5.3 Dress Code:

1. Students are expected to attend the college properly dressed. They should wear the

prescribed uniform while attending laboratory classes.

2. Students are expected to carry the identity cards, issued by the college, in the

campus. They are required to show the identity cards at the library, computer center,

office, etc. Students without Identity Cards are not allowed in to the laboratory classes.

5.4 Discipline & Punctuality:

1. No student shall enter or leave the class room without the permission of the teacher.

2. Calling students out of their class rooms while the lecture is in progress is prohibited.

3. Students are required to help in keeping the rooms, buildings, and premises clean and

tidy. Writing or sticking up of posters and notices on the walls is strictly prohibited.

4. Smoking, Consumption of alcohol, intoxicating drinks or drugs is strictly prohibited in

and around the college premises. Those indulging in such activities will be put severely

or expelled.

5. Students are expected to behave well with the staff, other students and the general

public. Any misbehavior, coming to the notice of the college authorities, will be severely

dealt with.

6. The conduct of the students should be exemplary not only within the premises of the

college but also outside. This will help in maintaining the image and status of the

college.

7. Students are required to observe silence at all times in the college campus. They shall

not talk in loud tone or call each other by shouting.

8. Students are prohibited from loitering in the verandahs / campus during class hours,

and sitting on the steps, stair-cases or parapet walls.

9. Students are not permitted to resort to strikes and demonstrations within the campus.

Participation in such activity entails their dismissal from the college. Any problem they

face may be represented to the Counselor / Head of the Department / Principal.

10. Students are prohibited carrying Cell Phones and organizing any meeting or

entertainment in the college campus without the permission of the college authorities.

11. The entry of outsiders without permission is prohibited. Any student found

responsible for bringing outsiders into the campus for settling personal disputes with

other students, shall be expelled from the college.

12. The college is entitled to take any disciplinary action, which is deemed necessary in

the case of any indiscipline on the part of the students. The same will be reflected on

the Conduct Certificate issued at the time of leaving the college.

13. No Student Unions, except Professional Associations, are permitted in the college.

14. If the students cause any damage to the college property knowingly or unknowingly

individually or in a group they have to pay 5 times to cost of property damaged them.

All the students are collectively responsible for the proper maintenance college

property i.e. building, furniture, lab equipment, garden, playgrounds, etc., recovery,

calculated on semester to semester basis, will be collected along with examination fee

for the semester.

15. Students should keep their vehicles only at the parking place allotted for the

purpose. Vehicle riding in the campus is strictly prohibited.

16. Sitting on the parapet wall and Riding beyond the parking limits, the fine will be

imposed to Rs.100.00

17. Breakage or loss of equipment /property as decided by the appropriate authority

18. The Principal/Director may, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department, or

otherwise, inflict the following punishments in the interests of the student discipline

and the Institution: fined, curtailment attendance, denial of promotion to next semester,

suspension, expulsion or such other action as deemed necessary for the maintenance

of discipline in the campus.

5.5. Lab Classes:

All students must attend lab classes without fail. Those absent shall follow this procedure

laid down in the prescribed format explaining valid reasons and obtain permission to attend

the future classes.

5.6 Fee:

1. All students admitted into this college, will be required to pay the prescribed tuition fee and

other specified fees. Failure of the same will result in the cancellation of admission. No

portion of fees will be refunded under any circumstances. If any student wishes to change

the college or discontinue the course at any point for any reason, he \ she shall not be

permitted to do so unless he \ she pays balance amount of four years fees which he \ she

would have to pay, if he \she continued till the completion of the course. His \ Her original

certificates including I.e., etc., will be issued only after all the dues as stated above, are

cleared by the students. All senior students must pay the college fee every year on or

before the 15th of July irrespective of the reopening of the college. If they fail the fine will be

imposed as per norms of the management.

2. Miscellaneous fee paid for expenditure related to training programs i.e., technical or soft

skills etc., is not refundable.

3. Other than the above, if any fees are levied by the University the student has to be pay the

same.

5.7. Transport:

All students who are availing the college bus facility must carry the bus-pass and must

produce when demanded, failing which they will not allowed to travel in the bus. All students

must travel in the allotted bus and routes. They should not change but occupy only their

allotted seats throughout. Unauthorized students caught in the bus for not having the bus

pass, should pay even if they traveled for one day also. First and second year are not

allowed to bring two-wheelers.

5.8. Library Rules

1. Library Books will be issued for 15 days time and renewal depends upon the demand of

the book.

2. Silence should be strictly maintained in the library.

3. Students are responsible for the library borrower card issued to them. Loss of the library

card should be reported in writing to the circulation section immediately. Duplicate library

borrower card will be issued on payment of Rs.150/- after a week time from the date of

application for duplicate cards.

4. The Library borrower card is not transferable.

5. Library books must be returned on or before the due date. Any student failed to do

so, 1st

week –Rs.1/-per day/per book, 2nd

week – Rs.2/-per day/per book and 3rd

week

–Rs.3/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed From 4th

week-Rs.5/-per day/per

book penalty will be imposed.

6. Students shall not make any sort of conversation in any part of the library, causing

inconvenience to others.

7. Students shall not bring their belongings inside the library and should keep them outside

the library.

8. Students leaving from the library should be checked at the exit.

9. Tearing of pages/stealing of books will invite suspension from using of the library facilities

and further disciplinary action will be taken against such students, as per college norms.

10. The borrower shall replace the New book within 7 days, otherwise, he/she has to pay

3 times of the book cost, along with fine. In case of lose of book.

5.9. General:

1. All the students admitted in this college have to give an undertaking to abide by the rules

and regulations of this college in prescribed format given by the college.

2. All the students should attend the college after vacations (Dasara / Sankranthi /

Christmas / Semester term / summer) on the re-opening day without fail.

3. Students must deposit all the relevant original certificates and documents at the time

of the admission Office and they will not be returned until completion of the course.

4. Admission of any student can be cancelled by the Management at any point during the

course for reasons which are not in consonance with the rules and regulations and which

are detrin the reputation of the college.

5. All the Students are here by informed that college authorities will not take any

responsibility for loss or theft of your valuable items and money kept in your bags or

some where else. Hence I request all the students are not to keep your valuables in class

room or anywhere without your presence.

6. Fee For Issue Of Duplicates

a) Duplicate Hall ticket Rs. 100.00

b) Duplicate Identity Card Rs. 100.00

c) Duplicate College Bus Pass Rs. 50.00

d) Duplicate Study Certificate for same purpose Rs. 50.00

e) Xerox copies of OD’s Rs. 50.00

All Breakage etc., penalties will be displayed on the Notice Board, and must be paid by the

student and no student will be allowed to write examination or internal test or laboratory

test, if penalties are not paid by the due date specified in the notice or circular.

5.10. Ragging

Ragging in any form inside or outside the college campus is banned/Prohibited vide

Ragging Act 26 of AP. legislative Assembly 1997. Those who indulge in this uncivilized

activity are liable for severe disciplinary actions besides being liable for prosecution.

SALIENT FEATURES

Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause insult 'or annoyance or fear or

apprehension or threat or intimidation or outrage of modesty or injury to a student.

S.

No. Nature of Ragging Punishment

1 Teasing, Embarrassing and Humiliating Imprisonment Upto 6 Month

or Fine Upto Rs 1000/- or Both.

2 Assaulting or using criminal Force or criminal

intimidation

Imprisonment Upto 1 Year or Fine Upto

Rs 2000/- or Both.

3 Wrongfully restraining or Confining or causing

hurt

Imprisonment Upto 2 Years or Fine Upto

Rs 5000/- or Both.

4 Causing grievous hurt kidnapping Or raping or

committing unnatural offence

Imprisonment Upto 5 Years or Fine Upto

Rs 10000/- or Both

5 Causing death or abating Suicide Imprisonment Upto 10 Years or fine

Upto Rs. 50000/- or Both

Note:

1. A student convicted of any of the above offences, will be, dismissed from the college

2. A student imprisoned for more than six months for any of the above offences 'will not be

admitted in any other College.

3. A student against whom there is prima facie evidence of ragging in any form will be

suspended from the college immediately.

Prohibition of Ragging

1. Ragging is prohibited as per act 26 of AP. Legislative assembly, 1997.

2. Ragging entails heavy fines and/or imprisonment.

3. Ragging invokes suspension and dismissal from the college.

4. Outsiders are prohibited from entering the college premises without permission.

5. All students must carry their identity cards and show them when Demanded.

6. The principal and staff will visit and inspect the rooms at any time.

7. Suspended students are debarred from entering the campus except when required to attend

enquiry and to submit an explanation .

6. ACADEMIC REGULATIONS R13 FOR B.TECH. (REGULAR) Applicable for the students of B.Tech. (Regular) from the Academic year 2013-14 and onwards

6.1. Award of B.Tech. Degree

A Student will be declared eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree if he fulfills the

following academic regulations:

i) Pursued a course of study for not less than four academic years and not more than

eight academic years.

ii) Register for 224 credits and secure 216 credits.

6.2. Students, who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the degree within

eight academic years from the year of their admission, shall forfeit their seat in B.Tech

Course.

6.3. Credits

I Year Semester

Periods /

Week Credits

Periods /

Week Credits

Theory 03+1/03 06 04 04

02 04 --- ---

Practical 03 04 03 02

Drawing 02T/03D 06 03

06

02

04

Mini Project --- ---- --- 02

Comprehensive Viva Voce --- -- --- 02

Seminar --- --- 6 02

Project --- --- 15 10

6.4. Distribution and Weight age of Marks

i. The performance of a student in each semester / I year shall be evaluated subject –

wise with a maximum of 100 marks for theory and 75 marks for practical subject. In

addition, Industry oriented mini-project, seminar and project work shall be evaluated

for 50,50 and 200 marks respectively.

ii. For theory subjects the distribution shall be 25 marks for Internal Evaluation and 75

marks for the End-Examination.

iii. For theory subjects, during the semester there shall be 2 midterm examinations.

Each mid term examination consists of objective paper for 10 marks and subjective

paper for 15 marks with a duration of 1 hour 50 minutes (20 minutes for objective

and 90 minutes for subjective paper).

iv. For practical subjects there shall be a continuous evaluation during the semester

for 25 sessional marks and 50 end examination marks. Out of the 25 marks for

internal, day-to-day work in the laboratory shall be evaluated for 15 marks and

internal examination for practical shall be evaluated for 10 marks conducted by the

concerned laboratory teacher. The end examination shall be conducted with

external examiner and laboratory teacher. The external examiner shall be appointed

from the cluster of colleges as decided by the University examination branch.

v. For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics,

Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the distribution shall be 25

marks for internal evaluation (15 marks for day-to-day work and 10 marks for

internal tests) and 75 marks for end examination. There shall be two internal tests in

a Semester and the better of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for

internal tests. However in the I year class, there shall be three tests and the average

of best two will be taken into consideration.

vi. There shall be an industry-oriented mini-project, in collaboration with an industry of

their specialization, to be taken up during the vacation after III year II semester

examination. However, the mini project and its report shall be evaluated with the

project shall be submitted in report form and should be presented before the

committee, which shall be evaluated for 50 marks. The committee consists of an

external examiner, head of the department, the supervisor of mini project and a

senior faculty member of the department. There shall be no internal marks for

industry oriented mini project.

vii. There shall be a seminar presentation in IV year II semester. For the seminar, the

student shall collect the information on a specialized topic and prepare a technical

report, showing his understanding over the topic, and submit to the department,

which shall be evaluated by the Departmental committee consisting of Head of the

department, seminar supervisor and a senior faculty member. The seminar report

shall be evaluated for 50 marks. There shall be no external examination for seminar.

viii. There shall be a comprehensive Viva-Voce in IV year II semester. The

Comprehensive Viva-Voce will be conducted by a Committee consisting of (i) Head

of the Department (ii) two Senior Faculty members of the Department. The

comprehensive Viva-Voce is aimed to assess the students’ understanding in various

subjects he/she studied during the B.Tech course of study. The comprehensive

Viva-Voce is evaluated for 100 marks by the Committee. There are no internal

marks for the comprehensive viva-voce.

ix. Out of a total of 200 marks for the project work, 50 marks shall be for Internal

Evaluation and 150 marks for the End Semester Examination. The End semester

Examination (viva-voce) shall be conducted by the same committee appointed for

industry oriented mini project. In addition the project supervisor shall also be

included in the committee. The topics for industry oriented mini project, seminar and

project work shall be conducted at the end of the IV year. The Internal Evaluation

shall be on the basis of two seminars given by each student on the topic of his

project.

x. Laboratory marks and the sessional marks awarded by the college are not final.

They are subject to scrutiny and scaling by the University wherever necessary. In

such cases, the sessional and laboratory marks awarded by the College will be

referred to a Committee. The Committee will arrive at a scaling factor and the marks

will be scaled as per the scaling factor. The recommendations of the Committee are

final and binding. The laboratory records and internal test papers shall be preserved

in the respective institutions as per the University norms and shall be produced to

the Committees of the University as and when the same is asked for.

6.5. Attendance Requirements:

i. A student shall be eligible to appear for University examinations if he acquires a

minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.

ii. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be condoned.

iii. Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and

below 75%) in each semester or I year may be granted by the College Academic

Committee.

iv. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he satisfies the attendance

requirement of the present semester / I year, as applicable. They may seek re-

admission for that semester / I year when offered next.

v. Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / I year are not

eligible to take their end examination of that class and their registration shall stand

cancelled.

vi. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation of shortage of attendance.

6.6. Minimum Academic Requirements:

The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the attendance

requirements mentioned in item no.6

i. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic requirements and

earned the credits allotted to each theory or practical design or drawing subject or

project if he secures not less than 35% of marks in the end examination and a

minimum of 40% of marks in the sum total of the internal evaluation and end

examination taken together.

ii. A student shall be promoted from II to III year only if he fulfills the academic

requirement of 37 credits from one regular and one supplementary examinations of I

year, and one regular examination of II year I semester irrespective of whether the

candidate takes the examination or not.

iii. A student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfills the

academic requirements of total 62 credits from the following examinations, whether the

candidate takes the examinations or not.

a) Two regular and two supplementary examinations of I year.

b) Two regular and one supplementary examinations of I semester.

c) One regular and one supplementary examinations of II year II semester.

d) One regular examination of III year I Semester.

iv. A student shall register and put up minimum attendance in all 200 credits and earn the

200 credits. Marks obtained in all 200 credits shall be considered for the calculation of

percentage of marks.

v. Students who fail to earn 200 credits as indicated in the course structure within eight

academic years from the year of their admission shall forfeit their seat in B.Tech

course and their admission shall stand cancelled.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.No. Content Page No.

1

1. General Information

About the college

1.0.Beautiful campus

1.1.Autonomous status

1.2.Performance

1.3.Faculty

1.4.Infrastructure

1.5.Laboratories

1.6.CAT Centre

1.7.English Language Laboratory

2

1.8.R&D Cell

1.9.Library

1.10.National Programme on Technology

Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)

1.11.Co-Curricular Activities

1.12.Professional bodies

1.13.Extra curricular activities

3 1.14.In House projects

1.15.MOUs

4 1.16.Student achievements

1.17.Alumni Outreach

5 1.18.Contact information

6

2. Placement and Higher Studies

2.1.Industry Grade skills required for Employment

2.2.Important criteria for employment

2.3.Higher Studies

2.4.Various Scholarships available in India

2.5.Various International Scholarships available in India

7 3. Student Career Oriented Professional Certification Courses

3.1 Help Desk

8

4. Performance Monitoring and Guidance

4.1. Student Feedback

4.2.Class Teacher

4.3.Class Representatives and their roles

4.4. Performance Counseling

4.5. Remedial Classes / Tutorial / Revisions

4.6. Backlog Management

4.7. Correspondence with Parents

9

5. Rules & Regulations for students 5.1. Administrative

5.2. Academic

5.3. Dress Code

5.4. Discipline & Punctuality

5.5. Lab Classes

5.6. Fee

5.7. Transport

5.8. Library Rules

5.9. General

5.10. Ragging

10

6. Academic Regulations 2009 for B.Tech. Regular 6.1. Award of B.Tech. Degree

6.2.

6.3. Credits

6.4. Distribution and Weightage of marks

11 6.5. Attendance Requirements

6.6. Minimum Academic Requirements

12 7. Course Calendar for the Year 1

13

8. B.Tech. IV Year Course Structure 2

9. PROBABILITY and STATISTICS 9.0 Course Description

9.1 Course Overview

9.2 Prerequisites

9.3 Marks Distributions

9.4 Evaluation Scheme

9.5 Course Outcomes

9.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

9.7 JNTUH Syllabus

9.8 Course Plan

9.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

9.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

9.11 Objective Questions

9.12 Tutorial Questions

9.13 Assignment Questions

3-41

14 10. DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN 10.0 Course Description

10.1 Course Overview

10.2 Prerequisites

10.3 Marks Distributions

10.4 Evaluation Scheme

10.5 Course Outcomes

10.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

10.7 JNTUH Syllabus

10.8 Course Plan

10.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

10.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

10.11 Objective Questions

10.12 Tutorial Questions

10.13 Assignment Questions

42-60

15 11.ELECTRONIC DEVICES 11.0 Course Description

11.1 Course Overview

11.2 Prerequisites

11.3 Marks Distributions

11.4 Evaluation Scheme

11.5 Course Outcomes

11.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

11.7 JNTUH Syllabus

11.8 Course Plan

11.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

11.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

11.11 Objective Questions

11.12 Tutorial Questions

11.13 Assignment Questions

61-97

16 12.COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE and ORGANIZATION 12.0 Course Description

12.1 Course Overview

12.2 Prerequisites

12.3 Marks Distributions

12.4 Evaluation Scheme

12.5 Course Outcomes

12.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

12.7 JNTUH Syllabus

12.8 Course Plan

12.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

12.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

12.11 Objective Questions

12.12 Tutorial Questions

12.13 Assignment Questions

98-127

17 13. DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES

13.0 Course Description

13.1 Course Overview

13.2 Prerequisites

13.3 Marks Distributions

13.4 Evaluation Scheme

13.5 Course Outcomes

13.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

13.7 JNTUH Syllabus

13.8 Course Plan

13.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

13.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

13.11 Objective Questions

13.12 Tutorial Questions

13.13 Assignment Questions

128-149

18 14.JAVA PROGRAMMING

14.0 Course Description

14.1 Course Overview

14.2 Prerequisites

14.3 Marks Distributions

14.4 Evaluation Scheme

14.5 Course Outcomes

14.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

14.7 JNTUH Syllabus

14.8 Course Plan

14.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

14.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

14.11 Objective Questions

14.12 Tutorial Questions

14.13 Assignment Questions

150-198

15.ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

15.0 Course Description

15.1 Course Overview

15.2 Prerequisites

15.3 Marks Distributions

15.4 Evaluation Scheme

15.5 Course Outcomes

15.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed

15.7 JNTUH Syllabus

15.8 Course Plan

15.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

15.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of Program

Outcomes

Unit 1to 5

15.11 Objective Questions

15.12 Tutorial Questions

15.13 Assignment Questions

199-251

19 16.ELECTRONIC DEVICES and DIGITAL LOGIC LAB 252-254

20 17.JAVA PROGRAMMING LAB 255-260

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

7. COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR

Description Period Duration

I Sem

Commencement of Classwork 17-07-2017 1st Spell of Instructions 17-07-2017 09-09-2017(9 Weeks) I mid term exams 11-09-2017 16-09-2017(1 Week) 2nd Spell of Instructions 18-09-2017 11-11-2017(8 weeks) II mid term exams 13-11-2017 18-11-2017 (1 weeks) Preparations & Practical Examinations 20-11-2017 25-11-2017(1 weeks) End Examinations 27-11-2017 08-12-2017 (2 weeks)

II Sem

Commencement of Classwork 18-12-2017 1st Spell of Instructions 18-12-2017 30-12-2017 (2 weeks) Supplementary Examinations of odd Sem.

02-01-2018 06-01-2018 (1 weeks)

Continuation of 2nd spell of Instructions 08-01-2018 17-02-2018 (6 weeks) I mid term exams 19-02-2018 24-02-2018 (1 week) 2nd Spell of Instructions 26-02-2018 13-04-2018 (7 weeks) II Mid term Examinations 16-04-2018 21-04-2018 (1 weeks) Preparations & Practical Examinations 23-04-2018 28-04-2018 (1 weeks) End Semester Examinations 30-04-2018 12-05-2018 (2 weeks)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 2

8. II YEAR IT COURSE STRUCTURE

CODE

SUBJECT

L

T P C

A2HS05 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 3 1 - 3

A2EC19 DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN 3 1 - 3

A2EC70 ELECTRONIC DEVICES 3 1 - 3

A2CS06 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION 3 1 - 3

A2CS07 DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES 3 1 - 3

A2CS13 JAVA PROGRAMMING 3 1 - 3

A2HS16 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 3 - - -

A2EC71 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND DIGITAL LOGIC LAB - - 3 2

A2CS15 JAVA PROGRAMMING LAB - - 3 2

TOTAL 18 6 6 22

Note: All End Examinations (Theory and Practical) are of three hours duration.

L-Theory T- Tutorials P- Practical C – Credits

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 3

9. PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS(A2HS05)

9.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Title PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

Course Code A2HS05

Regulation MLR16

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

4 - - 4

Course Coordinator Dr.Ch.Achi Reddy,Assoc.professor

Team of Instructors Mr J.ANIL REDDY,Asst.Professor, M.V.S.S.KIRAN KUMAR,Asst.Professor

9.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

This course introduces the principles of computer organization and the basic architecture concepts. The course emphasizes performance and cost analysis, instruction set design, pipelining, memory technology, memory hierarchy, virtual memory management, and I/O systems. It also deals with fundamentals of microprocessor, Assembly language programs. The main objective of this course is to examine how a computer operates at the machine level. It provides essential knowledge that is needed from engineering professionals to measure a simple PC performance. This course is presented to students by power point projections, lecture notes, course handouts, Assignments, Objective and subjective tests

9.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Knowledge of permutations and combinations and

Fundamentals in Basic Mathematics

9.3. MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End

Exam Marks

Total Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests. The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration.

75 100

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 4

It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion. Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

9.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S.

No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

2 I Assignment --- 5

3 II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

4 II Assignment ---- 5

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

realistic situation. It can be of either discrete or continuous type.

the discrete case, study of the binomial and the Poisson random variables and the Normal random Variable for the continuous case predominantly describe important probability distributions. Important Statistical properties for these random variables provide very good insight and are essential for industrial applications.

In this unit, the objective is to learn functions of many random variables through joint distributions.

Estimations of Statistical parameters, testing of hypothesis of few unknown statistical parameters.

characteristics of queue, The mean arrival and

9.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

Sl.No. Course Outcomes Blooms Level

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 5

1. to differentiate among many random variable involved in the probability models.

BL-2

2. distributions and sample mean and sample variance

BL-3

3.

calculate mean and proportions (small and large sample) and to make important decisions from few samples which are taken out of unmanageably huge populations .It is Mainly useful for non-circuit branches of engineering.

BL-4

4. Test the hypothesis (small and large sample) and to make

and large sample) and to make important decisions

BL-5

5. intensity and the waiting time. These are very useful tools in many engineering and data management problems in the industry. It is useful for all branches of engineering

BL-6

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply, develop BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

9.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematicalfoundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science andengineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-basedsystems to real-world problems (fundamental

engineering analysisskills).

S Assignments,

Exams

b An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyzeand interpret data (information retrieval skills).

S Assignments,

Tutorials

c

An ability to design, implement, and evaluate a computer-basedsystem, process, component, or program to meet desired needs,within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social,political, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability(creative skills).

H Assignments,

Tutorials

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams(teamwork).

S Lectures, Tutorials,

Problem solving

e An ability to analyze a problem, and identify, formulate and use theappropriate computing and engineering requirements for obtainingits solution (engineering problem solving skills).

H Lectures

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 6

f An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and socialissues and responsibilities (professional integrity).

N --

g An ability to communicate effectively, both in writing and orally(speaking / writing skills).

N --

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global impactof computing and engineering solutions on individuals,organizations, and society (engineering impact

assessment skills).

S Lectures,

Motivation

i Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in continuingprofessional development and life-long learning (continuingeducation awareness).

H Assignments,

Tutorials, Exams

j A knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness). N --

k An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary forcomputing and engineering practice (practical engineering

analysisskills). N --

l An ability to apply design and development principles in theconstruction of software and hardware systems of varyingcomplexity (software hardware interface).

S Lectures

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional developmentby pursuing postgraduate studies or face competitive examinationsthat offer challenging and rewarding careers in computing(successful career and immediate employment).

N --

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

B.Tech –II Year I Semester ( Common to CSE/IT)

Course Code: A2HS05 L T P C 3 1 - 3

Prerequisite(s): Knowledge of permutations and combinations and Fundamentals in BasicMathematics.

Course Objectives: COURSE OBJECTIVES:

randomness or an uncertainty in certain realistic situation. It can be of either discrete or continuous type.

Normal random Variable for the continuous case predominantly describe important probability

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 7

distributions. Important Statistical properties for these random variables provide very good insight and are essential for industrial applications.

le random variables. In this unit, the objective is to learn functions of many random variables through joint distributions.

Estimations of Statistical parameters, testing of hypothesis of few unknown statistical parameters.

Course Outcomes:

Up on successful completion of this course, student will be able to:

random variable involved in the probability models.

sample variance.

from few samples which are taken out of unmanageably huge populations .It is Mainly useful for non-circuit branches of engineering.

e waiting time.

These are very useful tools in many engineering and data management problems in the industry. It is useful for all branches of engineering.

SYLLABUS Course Code: A2HS05 L T P C 3 1 - 3

UNIT-I (10

Lectures)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 8

Single Random variables and probability distributions: Random variables – Discrete and continuous. Probability distributions, mass function/ density function of a probability distribution, Mathematical Expectation ,Moment about origin, Central moments Moment generating function of probability distribution. Binomial, Poisson & normal distributions and their properties. UNIT-II (8

Lectures) Multiple Random variables, Sampling Distributions: Joint probability distributions- Joint probability mass /density function, Marginal probability mass / density functions, Moment generating functions of the above three distributions, and hence finding the mean and variance. Sampling: Definitions of population, sampling, statistic, parameter. Types of sampling, Expected values of Sample mean and variance, sampling distribution, Standard error, Sampling distribution of means and sampling distribution of variance UNIT-III (10

Lectures) Testing of Hypothesis - large samples:

Parameter estimations – likelihood estimate, interval estimations. Testing of hypothesis: Null hypothesis, Alternate hypothesis, type I & type II errors – critical region, confidence interval, Level of significance. One sided test, two sided test, Large sample tests:

(i) Test of Equality of means of two samples equality of sample mean and population mean (cases of known variance & unknown variance, equal and unequal variances) (ii) Tests of significance of difference between sample S.D and population S.D. (iii) Tests of significance difference between sample proportion and population proportion &difference between two sample proportions. UNIT-IV (8

Lectures) Testing of Hypothesis-small sample tests:

Student t-distribution, its properties; Test of significance difference between sample mean and population mean, difference between means of two small samples Snedecor’s F- distribution and its properties. Test of equality of two population variances Chi-square distribution, it’s properties, Chi-square test of goodness of fit UNIT-V (8

Lectures) Correlation & Regression: Coefficient of correlation, the rank correlation, Covariance of two random variables. Regression- Regression Coefficient, The lines of regression and multiple correlation & regression

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 9

Queuing Theory: Structure of a queuing system, Operating Characteristics of queuing system, Transient and steady states, Arrival and service processes- Pure Birth-Death process Deterministic queuing models- M/M/1 Model of infinite queue, M/M/1 model of finite queue. TEXT BOOKS:

Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr.B.S.Grewal, Khanna publishers Probability and Statistics for Engineers by Richard Arnold Johnson, Irwin Miller and John E. Freund, New Delhi, Prentice Hall Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Sciences by Jay L. Devore, Cengage Learning

REFERENCE BOOKS:

Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, John Wiley & Sons Publisher Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics by S.C. Guptha &V.K. Kapoor, S. Chand Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists by Sheldon M. Ross, Academic Press

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 10

9.8 COURSE PLAN: At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes

UNIT L.

No. Topic to be covered

course learning

outcomes

Blooms

level Text Book

I

L1

Introduction of Probability & Statistics , Applications

Student able to

understand the

application of

Probability(1&2)

1&2

TB1

L2

Introduction to Random variables – Discrete and continuous

Student able to

understand types of

random

variables(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L3

Problems on discrete& continuous random variables

Student able to

Solve problems on

random variables

(2&4)

2&4 TB1& TB3

L4 Probability distribution function& Probability density function

Student able to

understand the

Probability

distribution(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L5 Mathematical Expectation, Moment about origin, Central moments

Student able to

understand constant

of P.D(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L6 Moment generating function of probability distribution.

Student able to

understand the

importance of

Moments(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L7 Above topic related Problems

Student able to solve MGF to PD(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L8 Binomial distributions, their properties& their related problems

Student able to understand application of Binomial distribution able

2&4 TB1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 11

solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

L9 Above topic related Problems

able solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L10 Poisson distributions, their properties& their related problems

able to understand application of poisson distribution able solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L11 Above topic related Problems

able solve problems on poisson distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L12 Normal distributions, their properties. & their related problems

able to understand application of Normal distribution able solve problems on Normal distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L13 Class-Test Unit-I

II

L14 UNIT-II Introduction to Joint probability distributions- Joint probability mass / density function,

Student able to understand the Joint probability distributions(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L15 Above topic related Problems

solve problems on joint probability distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L16 Marginal probability mass function Marginal probability density functions,

Student able to understand about Marginal probability density functions

2&4 TB1

L17 Above topic related Problems

Student able to solve problems(2&4) on this topic

2&4 TB1

L18 Moment generating function of Binomial, Poisson distributions

Student able to find MGF of BD,PD(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L19 Moment generating function of Normal

Student able to find 2&4 TB1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 12

distributions MGF of ND(2&4)

L20 Finding Mean & Variance

Student able to understand mean variance of PD(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L21 Introduction to Definitions of population, sampling, statistic, parameter. Types of sampling,

Student able to understand the importance of sampling(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L22 Expected values of Sample mean and variance& their problems

Student able to solve problems on sample mean etc(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L23 sampling distribution, Standard error, problems

Student able to solve problems on sampling distribution(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L24 Sampling distribution of means and sampling distribution of variance- problems

Student able to solve problems on this topic(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L25 Class-Test Unit-II

L26 UNIT-III Parameter

estimations – likelihood estimate, interval estimations.& problems

Student able to understand the concept of Estimation(1&2)

1&2 TB1

III

L27 Testing of

hypothesis: Null hypothesis, Alternate hypothesis, type I, & type II errors –

Student able to understand the Procedure of Testing of hypothesis(2&1)

1&2 TB1 &TB3

L28 critical region, confidence interval, Level of significance

Student able to understand about critical region(2&1)

1&2 TB1

L29 One sided test, two sided test,& Problems on it.

Student able to solve on testing of Hypothesis(2&4)

TB1

L30 Large sample tests:

Test of Equality of Student able to understand the

1&2 TB1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 13

means of two samples equality of sample mean and population mean (cases of known variance & unknown variance, equal and unequal variances)

large sample test(2&1)

L31 Tests of significance of difference between sample S.D and population S.D., problems

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample mean ,S.D(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L32 Tests of significance difference between sample proportion and population proportion & difference between two sample proportions.

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample proportion ,(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L33 Problems on above topic

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample proportion etc,(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L34 Class-Test Unit-III

L35 UNIT-IV Student t-distribution, its properties

Student able to understand the application of t-distribution(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L36 Test of significance difference between sample mean and population mean

Student able to understand the significance difference between sample mean and population mean(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L37 Above topic related Problems

able to solve problems on the significance

2&4

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 14

IV

difference between sample mean and population mean(2&4)

L38 Snedecor’s F- distribution and it’s properties

Student able to understand the F- distribution and it’s properties(1&2)

1&2 TB1 &TB3

L39 Test of equality of two population variances

Student able to understand the Test of equality of two population variances

1&2 TB1

L40 Chi-square distribution , it’s properties

Student able to understand the concept Chi-square distribution , it’s properties

1&2 TB1

L41 Chi-square test of goodness of fit& problems

Student able to solve problems on chi squared test(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L42 Class-Test Unit-IV

L43 UNIT-V

Introduction to Correlation , Coefficient of correlation

Student able to understand the concept of Correlation &Regression(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L44 problems on Coefficeint of correlation

Student able to solve problems on correlation(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L45 The rank correlation – repeated ranks

Student able to solve rank correlation problems(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L46 Regression Coefficient

Student able to find Regression Coefficient for the given data(2&4)

2&4 TB1& TB3

L47 The lines of regression and multiple correlation & regression.

Student able to understand the concept of multiple correlation and Regression(1&2)

1&2 TB1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 15

L48 Introduction to queuing theory, Structure of a queuing system, Operating Characteristics of queuing system, Transient andsteady states,

Student able to understand the concept of queuing theory (1&2)

1&2 TB1

L49 Pure Birth-Death process &Deterministic queuing models-

Student able to understand the Pure Birth-Death process(1&2)

1&2 TB1

L50 M/M/1 Model of infinite queue,

Student able to understand the infinite Queue model (1&2)

1&2 TB1

V

L51 above topic related Problems

Student able to solve problems on M/M/1 Model of infinite queue(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L52 M/M/1 model of finite queue .

Student able to understand the finite Queue model (1&2)

1&2 TB1

L53 Problems on above topic

Student able to solve problems on M/M/1 Model of finite queue(2&4)

2&4 TB1

L54 Class-Test Unit-V TB1

UNI

T L.

No. Topic

Session Objectives

(Minimum Two

sessions Objectives

indicating the

blooms level per

session)

Text

Boo

k

Teachin

g

methodo

logy

Date

Rema

rks Plan

ned

Cond

ucted

I

L1

Introduction of Probability & Statistics , Applications

Student able to

understand the

application of

Probability(1&2)

TB1

Chalk &Talk

L2

Introduction to Random variables –

Student able to

understand types of

TB1 Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 16

Discrete and continuous

random

variables(1&2)

L3 Problems on discrete& continuous random variables

Student able to

Solve problems on

random variables

(2&4)

TB1

&

TB3

Chalk &Talk

L4 Probability distribution function& Probability density function

Student able to

understand the

Probability

distribution(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L5 Mathematical Expectation, Moment about origin, Central moments

Student able to

understand constant

of P.D(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L6 Moment generating function of probability distribution.

Student able to

understand the

importance of

Moments(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L7 Above topic related Problems

Student able to solve MGF to PD(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L8 Binomial distributions, their properties& their related problems

Student able to understand application of Binomial distribution able solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L9 Above topic related Problems

able solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L10 Poisson distributions, their properties& their related problems

able to understand application of poisson distribution able solve problems on Binomial distribution(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L11 Above topic related Problems

able solve problems on poisson distribution(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L12 Normal distributions, their properties. & their related problems

able to understand application of Normal distribution

TB1 Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 17

able solve problems on Normal distribution(2&4)

L13 Class-Test Unit-I

II

L14 UNIT-II Introduction to Joint probability distributions- Joint probability mass / density function,

Student able to understand the Joint probability distributions(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L15 Above topic related Problems

solve problems on joint probability distribution(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L16 Marginal probability mass function Marginal probability density functions,

Student able to understand about Marginal probability density functions

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L17 Above topic related Problems

Student able to solve problems(2&4) on this topic

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L18 Moment generating function of Binomial, Poisson distributions

Student able to find MGF of BD,PD(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L19 Moment generating function of Normal distributions

Student able to find MGF of ND(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L20 Finding Mean & Variance

Student able to understand mean variance of PD(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L21 Introduction to Definitions of population, sampling, statistic, parameter. Types of sampling,

Student able to understand the importance of sampling(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L22 Expected values of Sample mean and variance& their problems

Student able to solve problems on sample mean etc(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L23 sampling distribution, Standard error, problems

Student able to solve problems on sampling distribution(2&4)

TB1

Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 18

L24 Sampling distribution of means and sampling distribution of variance- problems

Student able to solve problems on this topic(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L25 Class-Test Unit-II

L26 UNIT-III Parameter

estimations – likelihood estimate, interval estimations.& problems

Student able to understand the concept of Estimation(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

III

L27 Testing of

hypothesis: Null hypothesis, Alternate hypothesis, type I, & type II errors –

Student able to understand the Procedure of Testing of hypothesis(2&1)

TB1

&T

B3

Chalk &Talk

L28 critical region, confidence interval, Level of significance

Student able to understand about critical region(2&1)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L29 One sided test, two sided test,& Problems on it.

Student able to solve on testing of Hypothesis(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L30 Large sample tests:

Test of Equality of means of two samples equality of sample mean and population mean (cases of known variance & unknown variance, equal and unequal variances)

Student able to understand the large sample test(2&1)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L31 Tests of significance of difference between sample S.D and population S.D., problems

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample mean ,S.D(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L32 Tests of significance difference between sample proportion and population proportion & difference between two sample proportions.

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample proportion ,(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 19

L33 Problems on above topic

Student able to solve problems on Tests of significance of difference between sample proportion etc,(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L34 Class-Test Unit-III

L35 UNIT-IV Student t-distribution, its properties

Student able to understand the application of t-distribution(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L36 Test of significance difference between sample mean and population mean

Student able to understand the significance difference between sample mean and population mean(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

IV

L37 Above topic related Problems

able to solve problems on the significance difference between sample mean and population mean(2&4)

L38 Snedecor’s F- distribution and it’s properties

Student able to understand the F- distribution and it’s properties(1&2)

TB1

&T

B3

Chalk &Talk

L39 Test of equality of two population variances

Student able to understand the Test of equality of two population variances

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L40 Chi-square distribution , it’s properties

Student able to understand the concept Chi-square distribution , it’s properties

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L41 Chi-square test of goodness of fit& problems

Student able to solve problems on chi squared test(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 20

L42 Class-Test Unit-IV

V

L43 UNIT-V

Introduction to Correlation , Coefficient of correlation

Student able to understand the concept of Correlation &Regression(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L44 problems on Coefficeint of correlation

Student able to solve problems on correlation(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L45 The rank correlation – repeated ranks

Student able to solve rank correlation problems(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L46 Regression Coefficient

Student able to find Regression Coefficient for the given data(2&4)

TB1

&

TB3

Chalk &Talk

L47 The lines of regression and multiple correlation & regression.

Student able to understand the concept of multiple correlation and Regression(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L48 Introduction to queuing theory, Structure of a queuing system, Operating Characteristics of queuing system, Transient andsteady states,

Student able to understand the concept of queuing theory (1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L49 Pure Birth-Death process &Deterministic queuing models-

Student able to understand the Pure Birth-Death process(1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L50 M/M/1 Model of infinite queue,

Student able to understand the infinite Queue model (1&2)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L51 above topic related Problems

Student able to solve problems on M/M/1 Model of infinite queue(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L52 Student able to TB1 Chalk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 21

9.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes a b c d e f g h i j k l m n I S S H II H S H III S S S IV S S S V S H S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

9.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes a b c d e f g h i j k l m n 1 S S 2 S H H S S 3 H S H 4 S S 5 H H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative Question Bank

9.11. UNIT – I Single Random variables and probability distributions:

9.11.1DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS

1. If f(x) is the distribution function x given by

M/M/1 model of finite queue .

understand the finite Queue model (1&2)

&Talk

L53 Problems on above topic

Student able to solve problems on M/M/1 Model of finite queue(2&4)

TB1 Chalk &Talk

L54 Class-Test Unit-V TB1 Chalk &Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 22

Determine (i) f(x) (ii) k (iii) mean 2. Using recurrence formula find the probabilities when x= 0, 1,2,3,4 and 5: if the mean of Poisson distribution is 3? (ii) Out of 800 families with 5 children each, how many would you expect to have (i) 3 boys (ii) either 2 or 3 boys

3. (i)The mean and variance of binomial distribution are 4 and 4/3 respectively. Find p(x>1). (ii)Let x denote the number of heads is a single toss of 4 fair coins. Determine (a) p(x2) (b) p (1≤x 3) 4. If the masses of 300 students are normally distributed with mean 68 kgs and standard Deviation 3 kgs how many students have masses (i) Greater than 72 kgs (ii) Less than or equal to 64kgs (iii) Between 65 and 71 kgs inclusive ? 5. Derive probability distribution for D.R.V? 6. Derive variance of a Binomial distribution 7. Derive mean of normal distribution 8. Derive mode of normal distribution. 9. Derive mean of Poisson distribution 10. Derive variance of Poisson distribution 9.11.2 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. If a die is thrown 3 times the sample space contains ---- elements [d]

a) 1/27 b)1/216 c)27 d)216

2. In tossing of 3 coins the probability of getting at least one head is [c]

a) 5/8 b)1/8 c)7/8 d)3/8

3. If A, B are two mutually exclusive events then P (Ac U Bc) = [a]

a) 1-P(A)P(B) b)1 c)0 d)P(Ac)P(Bc)

4. If a coin is tossed 6 times in succession, the probability of getting at least one head is [c]

a) 1/ 64 b)3/32 c)63/64 d)1/ 2

5. A coin is tossed 3 times. The probability of obtaining two heads will be [a]

a) 3/ 8 b)½ c)1 d)2

6 .Eight coins are tossed simultaneously. The probability of getting at least 6 heads is[d]

a) 57/64 b)229/256 c)7/64 d)37/256

7. Three unbiased coins are tossed simultaneously. This is repeated four times. The probability of getting at least one head each time is[b] a) (3/ 4)4 b)(7/8)4 c)(1/8)4 d)(1/ 4)4

8. The probability of the king of hearts drawn from a pack of cards once in 52 trials is[c]

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 23

a) 2/3 b)1/ 3 c)1/ 4 d)3/ 4

9. In a standard normal curve the area between z=-1 and z=1 is nearly[c]

a) 69% b)70% c)68% d)66%

10. If a coin is tossed 6 times in succession, the probability of getting at least one head is[c]

a) a)1/ 64 b)3/32 c)63/64 d)1/ 2

11. Let X be the Poisson Random Variable such that 2 P(X=0)=P(X=2) then the standard deviation of X is [d]

a) 4 b)2 c)- 2 d) 2

12. The random variable X has a Poisson Distribution .If P(X=3)=1/6 P(X=2)=1/3 then

P(X=0) is[a]

a) e-3/2 b) e3/2 c) e-3 d) e-1/2

13. Z score is a type of ____________ score. [c] A) Outlier B) standard C) normalized D) T-type 14. The normal curve represents a distribution where the __________, ___________, And ___________ are equal to each other. [d] A) Range / standard deviation / variance B) mean / median / standard deviation C) Mode/ median / standard deviation D) mean / median / mode 15. What percentage of scores will fall between –3 and +3 standard deviations in a normal distribution? [d] A) 50% B) 68.26% C) 95.44% D) 99.74%

16. A random variable is said to be discrete if[b]

a) Its possible values can be counted or listed.

b) It can assume any real number within an interval.

c) The rules of probability apply.

d) It can be represented graphically.

17. Suppose that X is a random variable that can assume the values 1, 2, and 3. If P(X = 1) = 0.1

and P(X = 2) = 0.2, what is P(X = 3)? [c]

a) 0.3 b) 0.5 c) 0.7 d) 0.9 18. A committee of five members is to be randomly selected from a group of nine freshman and seven sophomores. Which expression represents the number of different committees of three freshman and two sophomores that can be chosen? [d] a) 9P3 • 7P2 b) 9C3 + 7C2 c) 16C3 • 16C2 d) 9C3 • 7C2

9.11.3 TUTORIAL AND ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

1. State and prove addition Theorem of probability

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 24

2. State Baye’s theorem.

3. Define the following

(i).Random variable (ii) Distribution function (iii) Condition probability 4. Show that for the binomial distribution: a) The mean is np and (b) the variance is npq 5. Show that both median and mode of normal distribution coincide with its mean. 6. Define sample space and explain the difference between discrete sample space and continuous sample Space by giving examples.

7. The height of 300 students are normally distributed with mean 172 centimeters and standard deviation 6

cm, how many students have heights? a) Greater than 184 centimeters; b) Between 164 and 180 centimeters (inclusive) and c) Equal to 172 centimeters

8. State the multiplication rule of probabilities. The students in a class are selected at random one after the Other for an examination. Find the probability that the boys and girls in the class alternate if the class

Consists of (a) 4 boys and 3 girls; (b) 3 boys and 3 girls. 9. If in eight throws of a fair die, getting a 5 or 6 is considered as a success, find the mean and the Standard deviation of the successes. 10. In a normal distribution 31% of the items are under 31% and 8% are over 64. Find the mean And standard deviation of the distribution. 11. Let F(X) be the distribution function of random variable X given by = 3, ℎ 𝑛 ≤ ≤ 3, ℎ 𝑛 > 3, ℎ 𝑛 ≤

Determine (i) c (ii) mean (iii) p(x>1) 12. If the masses of 300 students are normally distributed with mean 68 kgs and standard Deviation 3 kgs how many students have masses (i) Greater than 72 kgs (ii) Less than or Equal to 64kgs (iii) between 65 and 71 kgs inclusive? 9.12 UNIT-II Multiple Random variables, Sampling Distributions: 9.12.1 DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS

1. Define joint probability density function and marginal probability mass function. 2. A population consists of the five numbers 3, 4, 7, 9, and 12. Consider all possible

samples of size two, which can be drawn with replacement from this population. Find: a)the mean of the population and b)the standard deviation of the population

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 25

3. A research worker wants to determine the average time it takes a mechanic to rotate the tires of a car, and she wants to be able to assert with 95% confidence that the mean of her sample is off by at most 0.5 minute. If she presumes from the past experience that minutes, how large a sample will she have to take?

4. Describe about moment generating function of Poisson distribution?

5. Explain types of sampling?

6. Sample of size 2 are taken from the population 4,8,12,16,20,24 without replacement. Find (a) Mean of the population (b) Standard deviation of the population(c) The mean of the sampling distribution of the means (d) the standard deviation of the sampling distributions of means

9.12.2 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. Which of the following symbols represents a population parameter? [b]

a. SD

b. σ

c. r

d. 0

2. If you drew all possible samples from some population, calculated the mean for each of the

samples, and constructed a line graph (showing the shape of the distribution) based on all of

those means, what would you have? [c]

a. A population distribution

b. A sample distribution

c. A sampling distribution

d. A parameter distribution

3. What does it mean when you calculate a 95% confidence interval? [d]

a. The process you used will capture the true parameter 95% of the time in the long run

b. You can be “95% confident” that your interval will include the population parameter

c. You can be “5% confident” that your interval will not include the population parameter

d. All of the above statements are true

4. What would happen (other things equal) to a confidence interval if you calculated a 99 percent

confidence interval rather than a 95 percent confidence interval? [d]

a. It will be narrower

b. It will not change

c. The sample size will increase

d. It will become wider

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 26

5. Which of the following statements sounds like a null hypothesis? [c]

a. The coin is not fair

b. There is a correlation in the population

c. There is no difference between male and female incomes in the population

d. The defendant is guilty

6. What is the standard deviation of a sampling distribution called? [c]

a. Sampling error

b. Sample error

c. Standard error

d. Simple error

7. A ______ is a subset of a _________. [a]

a. Sample, population

b. Population, sample

c. Statistic, parameter

d. Parameter, statistic

8. A _______ is a numerical characteristic of a sample and a ______ is a numerical characteristic

of a population. [c]

a. Sample, population

b. Population, sample

c. Statistic, parameter

d. Parameter, statistic

9. A sampling distribution might be based on which of the following? [d]

a. Sample means

b. Sample correlations

c. Sample proportions

d. All of the above

10. As a general rule, researchers tend to use ____ percent confidence intervals. [b]

a. 99%

b. 95%

c. 50%

d. none of the above 11.Moment generating function of discrete probability distribution of the variate X about x=a is (a)

a)Ma(t) =∑ 𝑝𝑖 𝑡 𝑥𝑖−𝛼 b) Ma(t) =∑ 𝑝𝑖 c)a and b d)none 12.Moment generating function of Binomial distribution is……… (a)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 27

a)(q+pe^t)^n b) (q+pe^t)^(n+1) c) (p+qe^t)^n d)None 13. Moment generating function of continuous probability distribution of the variate X about x=a is (a)

a) Ma(t)=∫ 𝑡 𝑥−𝑎∞−∞ b) Ma(t)= ∫ 𝑡 𝑥−𝑎∞ c)a and b d)none

14. Mean deviation from the mean when x is discrete distribution is given by (a)

a)∑| 𝑖 − 𝜇| 𝑖 b)∫ | − 𝜇|∞−∞ c)both a& b d)none

15. Mean deviation from the mean when x is continuous distribution is given by (b)

a)∑| 𝑖 − 𝜇| 𝑖 b)∫ | − 𝜇|∞−∞ c)both a& b d)none

9.12.3. TUTORIAL AND ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

1. Define joint probability density function and marginal probability mass function. 2. A population consists of the five numbers 3, 4, 7, 9, and 12. Consider all possible

samples of size two, which can be drawn with replacement from this population. Find: a)the mean of the population and b)the standard deviation of the population

3. A research worker wants to determine the average time it takes a mechanic to rotate the tires of a car, and she wants to be able to assert with 95% confidence that the mean of her sample is off by at most 0.5 minute. If she presumes from the past experience that minutes, how large a sample will she have to take?

4. Describe about moment generating function of Poisson distribution?

5. Explain types of sampling?

6. Sample of size 2 are taken from the population 4,8,12,16,20,24 without replacement. Find (a) Mean of the population (b) Standard deviation of the population(c) The mean of the sampling distribution of the means (d) the standard deviation of the sampling distributions of means

7. Explain the central moments

8. Find the four moments of

X 1 2 3 4 Y 3 1.5 6 7.5

9.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

9.13.1 DESRIPTIVE QUESTIONS

1. Write a short note on Null hypothesis and alternative hypothesis (b) Type I and Type II

errors

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 28

(c) Critical region 2. A lady stenographer claims that she can take dictation at the rate of 120 words per minute. Can We reject her claim on the basis of 100 trials in which she demonstrates a mean of 116 words With a standard deviation of 15 words per minute?

2. A random sample of size =100 is taken from a population with Give that the sample mean is

Construct a 95% confidence interval for the population mean. 3. The standard deviation of the heights of 16 male students chosen at random in a school of

1000 male students is 6.10 cm. Find 95% and 99% confidence limits of the standard

deviation for all male students at the school.

4. Explain basic steps involved in testing of hypothesis.

5. A trucking firm suspects that claim that the average life time of certain tires is at least

28,000 miles. To test the claim, the firm pus 40 of these tires on its trucks and gets a mean

life time of 27, 463 miles with a standard deviation of 1, 348 miles. What can it conclude if

the probability of type I error is to be at most 0.01?

6. A random sample of size 25 from a normal population has the mean 47.5 and the standard

deviation 8.4. Does this information tend to support the claim that the mean of the

population is = 42.1?

7. On the basis of their total scores, 200 candidates of a civil service examination are divided

in to two groups, the upper 30% and the remaining 70%. Consider the first question of the

examination .Among the first group, 40 had the correct answer, where as among the second

group,80 had the correct answer. on the basis of these results , can one conclude that the

first question is not good at discriminating ability of the type being examined here?

8. The means of simple samples of sizes 1000 and 2000 are 67.5 and 68.0 cm respectively.

Can the samples be regarded as drawn from the same population of S.D. 2.5cm?

9. A sample of 900 members is found to have a mean of 3.4 cm. Can it be reasonably regarded

as a truly random sample from a large population with mean 3.25 cm and S.D. 1.61cm

10. A random sample of 100 teachers in a large metropolitan area revealed a mean weekly

salary of Rs.487 with a standard deviation Rs.48. with what degree of confidence can we

assert that the average weekly salary of all teachers in the metropolitan area is between

478.6 to 495.4.

9.13.2 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 29

1. Which of the following is the researcher usually interested in supporting when he or she is

engaging in hypothesis testing? [a]

a. The alternative hypothesis

b. The null hypothesis

c. Both the alternative and null hypothesis

d. Neither the alternative or null hypothesis

2. _________ are the values that mark the boundaries of the confidence interval. [b]

a. Confidence intervals

b. Confidence limits

c. Levels of confidence

d. Margin of error

3. _____ results if you fail to reject the null hypothesis when the null hypothesis is actually

false[b].

a. Type I error

b. Type II error

c. Type III error

d. Type IV error

4. A good way to get a small standard error is to use a ________. [c]

a. Repeated sampling

b. Small sample

c. Large sample

d. Large population

5. A ________ is a range of numbers inferred from the sample that has a certain probability of

including the population parameter over the long run. [c]

a. Hypothesis

b. Lower limit

c. Confidence interval

d. Probability limit

6. ________ is the standard deviation of a sampling distribution. [a]

a. Standard error

b. Sample standard deviation

c. Replication error

d. Meta error

7. When the researcher rejects a true null hypothesis, a ____ error occurs. [a]

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 30

a. Type I

b. Type A

c. Type II

d. Type B

9.13.3 TUTORIAL AND ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

1. Explain basic steps involved in testing of hypothesis.

2. Define and distinguish between point estimation and interval estimation

3. A trucking firm suspects that claim that the average life time of certain tires is at least

28,000 miles. To test the claim, the firm pus 40 of these tires on its trucks and gets a mean

life time of 27, 463 miles with a standard deviation of 1, 348 miles. What can it conclude if

the probability of type I error is to be at most 0.01?

4. A random sample of size 25 from a normal population has the mean 47.5 and the standard

deviation 8.4. Does this information tend to support the claim that the mean of the

population is = 42.1?

5. On the basis of their total scores, 200 candidates of a civil service examination are divided

in to two groups, the upper 30% and the remaining 70%. Consider the first question of the

examination .Among the first group, 40 had the correct answer, where as among the second

group,80 had the correct answer. on the basis of these results , can one conclude that the

first question is not good at discriminating ability of the type being examined here?

6. The means of simple samples of sizes 1000 and 2000 are 67.5 and 68.0 cm respectively.

Can the samples be regarded as drawn from the same population of S.D. 2.5cm?

7. A sample of 900 members is found to have a mean of 3.4 cm. Can it be reasonably regarded

as a truly random sample from a large population with mean 3.25 cm and S.D. 1.61cm

8. A random sample of 100 teachers in a large metropolitan area revealed a mean weekly

salary of Rs.487 with a standard deviation Rs.48. with what degree of confidence can we

assert that the average weekly salary of all teachers in the metropolitan area is between

478.6 to 495.4.

9. An ambulance service claims that it takes, on the average 8.9 minutes to reach its

destination in emergency calls. To test this claim, the agency which issues license to

ambulance services has them timed on 50 emergency calls getting a mean of 9.2 minutes

and a standard deviation of 1.6 minutes. What can they infer at 5% level of significance?

9.14 UNIT – IV: Testing of Hypothesis-small sample tests

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 31

9.14.1 Descriptive questions

1. A sample of 9 items had the following values: 45, 47, 50, 52, 48, 47, 49, 53 and 51. Does the mean of these nine items differ significantly from the assumed population mean of 47.5? 2.A manufacturer of fuses claims that with a 20% overload, the fuses will blow in 12.40 minutes on the average. To test this claim, a sample of 20 of these fuses was subjected to a 20% overload and the times it took them to blow had a mean of 10.63 minutes and standard deviation of 2.48 minutes. It can be assumed drawn from a normal population. Do they tend to support or refute the claim of the manufacturer? 3. Define Chi-Square test. Write the Confidence interval of sample proportion 4. A 11 students were given a test in statistics they were given a month’s further tuition and a second test of equal difficulty was held at the end of it. Do the marks give evidence that the students have benefited by extra coaching?

Boys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Marks I test

23 20 19 21 18 20 18 17 23 16 19

Marks II test

24 19 22 18 20 22 20 20 23 20 17

5. Two horses A and B were tested according to the time in seconds to run a particular race with the following results. Test whether you can discriminate between two horses

Horse A 28 30 32 33 33 29 34 Horse B 29 30 30 24 27 29 --

6. The results of polls conducted 2 weeks and 4 weeks before a election are shown in the

following table: Significance to test whether there has been a change in opinion during the 2 weeks between the rolls. 7. The measurements of the output of two units have given the following results. Assuming that both samples have been level whether the two populations have the same variance.

Unit-A 14.1 10.1 14.7 13.7 14.0

Two weeks before election 4 weeks before election

For Democratic candidate 84 66

Undecided 37 43

For Republican candidate 79 91

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 32

Unit-B 14.0 14.5 13.7 12.7 14.1

9.14.2 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. A post hoc test is ___. [c]

a. A test to compare two or more means in one overall test

b. A test to determine regression to the mean

c. A follow-up test to the analysis of variance when there are three or more groups

d. A follow-up test to the independent t-test

2. The use of the laws of probability to make inferences and draw statistical conclusions about

populations based on sample data is referred to as ___________. [b]

a. Descriptive statistics

b. Inferential statistics

c. Sample statistics

d. Population statistics

3.A statistical test used to determine whether a correlation coefficient is statistically significant is

called the ___________. [d]

a. One-way analysis of variance

b. t-test for independent samples

c. Chi-square test for contingency tables

d. t-test for correlation coefficients

9.14.3: TUTORIAL AND ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

1. A manufacturer of fuses claims that with a 20% overload, the fuses will blow in 12.40 minutes on the average. To test this claim, a sample of 20 of these fuses was subjected to a 20% overload and the times it took them to blow had a mean of 10.63 minutes and standard deviation of 2.48 minutes. It can be assumed drawn from a normal population. Do they tend to support or refute the claim of the manufacturer? 2. Define Chi-Square test. Write the Confidence interval of sample proportion 3. A 11 students were given a test in statistics they were given a month’s further tuition and a second test of equal difficulty was held at the end of it. Do the marks give evidence that the students have benefited by extra coaching?

Boys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Marks I test

23 20 19 21 18 20 18 17 23 16 19

Marks II test

24 19 22 18 20 22 20 20 23 20 17

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 33

4. Two horses A and B were tested according to the time in seconds to run a particular race with the following results. Test whether you can discriminate between two horses

Horse A 28 30 32 33 33 29 34 Horse B 29 30 30 24 27 29 --

5.A certain stimulus administered to each of 12 patients resulted in the following increases of blood pressure.5,2,8,-1,3,0,-2,1,5,0,4,6. Can it be concluded that the stimulus will in general be accompanied by an increase in blood pressure?

9.15 UNIT – V: Correlation & regression and Queuing theory:

9.15.1 Descriptive questions

1. Two variables x and y are connected by the relation. Prove that the coefficient of

correlation between them is either 1 or – 1

2. Obtain the coefficient of correlation and the equations of the lines of regressions for the

following data:

X 65 66 67 67 68 69 79 72 Y 67 68 65 68 73 72 69 71

3.

Find the rank correlation coefficient for the above data:

3. The two regression equations of the variables x and y are and

. Then find correlation coefficient between x &y?

4. If Then find cov (x,y)?

5. Find the correlation coefficient between x and y and obtain the two regression lines for

the data given below:

X 68 64 75 50 64 80 75 40 55 64

Y 62 58 68 45 81 60 68 48 50 70

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 34

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y 10 12 16 28 25 36 41 49 40 50

6. Find the correlation coefficient for the following bivariate distribution:

15 – 25 25 – 35 35 - 45 45 – 55 55 – 65 65 -75

15 – 25 1 1

25 – 35 2 12 1

35 - 45 4 10 1

45 – 55 3 6 1

55 – 65 1 2 4 2

7. Explain briefly the characteristics of infinite queuing model

8. A T.V repair man finds that the time spent on has jobs has an exponential distribution

with mean 30 minutes. If he repairs sets in the order in which they came in, and if the

arrival of sets in approximately Poisson with an average rate of 10 per-8-hour day. What

is repairman’s expected idle time each day? How many jobs are a head of the average set

just brought us?

9. A toll gate is operated on a frequency where cars arrive according to a Poisson

distribution with mean frequency of 1.2 cars per minute the time of completing payment

follows an exponential distribution with mean of 20 seconds find i)average no of

customers in the system ii)average queue length iii)variance of n customer in the system

10. Barber a take 15 minutes to complete one hair cut customer arrive in his shop at an

average rate of one every 30 minutes the arrival processes are Poisson and the service

time follow an exponential distribution i)where would you expect a bigger queue

ii)Where would you require more time waiting included to complete a hair cut

11. in a (M/M/1)(∞/ FIFO )system Lq and Ls denote respectively the average queue length and average system length respectively and Wq and Ws are average waiting time in the queue and

average time spent in the system pick up the correct relations among the following I) SS W=L

ii)q q

L W iii) QQ LW iv) SLq

L v) SWq

W vi) QQ LW vii) SS LW viii) SS LW

9.15.2 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. Which of the following is the highest range of r? [c]

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 35

a)0 and 1 b) -1 and 0 c) -1 and 1 d) None of these

2. Two lines of regression pass through the point[c]

a) (x, y)

b) (2x, y)

c) origin

d) none

3. The coefficient of correlation[c]

a) Cannot be positive b) Cannot be negative c) Can be either positive or negative d) None of these 4. The coefficient of correlation is independent of[a] a) change of scale only b) change of origin only c) change of origin and scale d)No change 5. If the coefficient of correlation between the variables x and y is –1 then the lines of regression [b]

a) intersect

b) b)coincide

c) c)parallel

d) d)none

6. If x+y > 0 then coefficient of correlation is [b] [

a) < 0

b) > 0

c) 0

d) 0

7. If r= 0.26 the sum of the squares of differences of ranks is 122.5 then n is[a]

a) 10

b) 12

c) 13

d) 9

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 36

8. If di2=45 n=10. In x series 2 variables are repeated and in y series one value is repeated

thrice then rank correlation is[b]

a) 0.17

b) b)0.71

c) c)0.51

d)0.27

9. If the variables x and y are independent then the angle between the lines of regression is[d]

a) 0

b) 450

c) 600

d) 900

10. If two coefficients of regression are 0.1 and 0.4 then coefficient of correlation is[b]

a) 0.1

b) 0.2

c) 00.3

d) 0.4

11. If di

2= 24.5 and N=10 the rank correlation coefficient is[a]

a) > 0

b) < 0

c) 0

d) 0

12. The coefficient of correlation[d]

(a) Has no limits (b) can be less than 1 (c) can be more than 1 (d) varies between ± 1

13. Coefficient of correlation =[b]

(a) bxy*byx

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 37

(b) √ bxy*byx (c) √ bxy (d) √ byx

14. One regression coefficient is positive then the other regression coefficinet is[a]

(a) Positive (b) negative (c) equal to zero (d) cannot say

15. When two regression lines coincide then r is[a]

(a) 0 (b) – 1 (c) 1 (d) 0.5

16.The regression lines cut each other at the point of[a]

(a) Average of X and Y (b) average of X only (c) average of Y only (d) none

17. If there is no relationship between the variables the then =[c] a) POSITIVE

b) NEGATIVE c) POSITIVE & NEGATIVE d) NONE 18. If r= 1 then the two regression lines are[c] a)perpendicular b)parallel or coincide c)neither parallel nor perpendicular d)None of these 19.There is no relationship between two variables if[c] a)r=1 b)r=-1 c)r=0 d) all the above 20. Two random variables X and Y are uncorrelated with each other if[c] a) E[XY]=E[x]+E[y] b) E[XY]=E[X]-E[Y] c)E[XY]=E[x].E[Y] d)E[XY]=0

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 38

21.The average number of customer in the system is [a]

a)

1

b)

1

c) 21

d)

1

2

22.The length of queue is[c]

a)

1

b)

1

c)

1

2

d)

1

2

23.The average waiting time in the system[d]

a)

1

b) 2

1

c) 2

1

d)

1

24.FIFO means…………[c] a)First incoming first outing b)First incoming first outside c)First in first out d)First inside first outing

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 39

25. FCFS means…….[b] a) First coming first service b) First come first service c) First coming first servicing d) First come first servicing 26. Probability that there are n customers in the system is….. [b]

a) )1( 3 n

b) )1( n

c) )1( n

d) )1( n

27. Which of the following best describes queuing theory? [c] a. The study of arrival rates. b. The study of service times. c. The study of waiting lines. d. The evaluation of service time costs 28. Which of the following is a reason to employ queuing theory? [a] a. To reduce customer wait time in line. b. To reduce service times. c. To generate more arrivals to the system. d. To reduce worker idle time in line 29. Which type of queuing system are you likely to encounter at a grocery store? [d] a. Single waiting line, single service station .b .Multiple waiting lines, single service station. c. Single waiting line, multiple service stations. d. Multiple waiting lines, multiple service stations 30. Which type of queuing system are you likely to encounter at a Wendy's restaurant? [c] a. Single waiting line, single service station. b. Multiple waiting lines, single service station. c. Single waiting line, multiple service stations. d. Multiple waiting lines, multiple service stations 31. A Poisson distribution shape can be described as[c] a. slightly skewed to the left. b. symmetric around the parameter c. skewed to the right. d. discrete so it lacks any definable shape 32. The number of arrivals to a store follows a Poisson distribution with mean = 10/hour. What is the mean inter-arrival time? [b] a. 6 seconds b. 6 minutes c. 10 minutes d. 10 hour 33.Which of the following is a reason to employ queuing theory? [a] a. To reduce customer wait time in line.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 40

b. To reduce service times c. To generate more arrivals to the system. d. To reduce worker idle time in line 34. What is the service policy in the queuing systems presented in this chapter that is considered "fair" by the customers? [a] a .FIFO b. LIFO c. FILO d. Priority 35. Which type of queuing system are you likely to encounter at an ATM? [a] a. Single waiting line, single service station .b .Multiple waiting lines, single service station. c. Single waiting line, multiple service stations. d. Multiple waiting lines, multiple service stations 36. If the arrival process is modeled as a Poisson random variable with arrival rate , then the average time between arrivals is[b] a.1/ b.1/ c.1/ 2 d.σ 37. For a Poisson random variable represents the ____ number of arrivals per time period[c] a. maximum b. minimum c. average d. standard deviation of 38. Arrival pattern means………[a] a) Input pattern b) Service pattern c) Service mechanism d) Queue discipline 39. LIFO means ……….[d] a)last inside first outing b) Last in first outing c) Last inside first out d) Last in first out 40. The queue is too long and he has no time to wait is called[a] a) Balking b) Reneging c) Priorities d) Jockeying 9.15.3 TUTORIAL AND ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

1. Explain briefly the characteristics of infinite queuing model

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 41

2. A T.V repair man finds that the time spent on has jobs has an exponential distribution

with mean 30 minutes. If he repairs sets in the order in which they came in, and if the

arrival of sets in approximately Poisson with an average rate of 10 per-8-hour day. What

is repairman’s expected idle time each day? How many jobs are a head of the average set

just brought us?

3. A toll gate is operated on a frequency where cars arrive according to a Poisson

distribution with mean frequency of 1.2 cars per minute the time of completing payment

follows an exponential distribution with mean of 20 seconds find i)average no of

customers in the system ii)average queue length iii)variance of n customer in the system

4. At the election commission office, for voter’s identity card, a photographer takes passport

size photo at an average rate of 24 photos/hour. The photographer must wait until the

voter blinks, so the time to take a photo is exponentially distributed. Customers arrive at

Poisson distributed average rate of 20 voters/hour. Find how much time the time voter

has to spend at election commission office on an average?

5. Find the correlation coefficient between x and y and obtain the two regression lines for

the data given below:

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y 10 12 16 28 25 36 41 49 40 50

6.Find Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation from the following data Wages 100 101 102 102 100 99 97 98 96 95 Cost of living

98 99 99 97 95 92 95 94 90 91

7.If 𝜃 is an angle between two regression lines show that tan 𝜃 = −𝑟2𝑟 . 𝜎 𝜎𝜎2+𝜎2 . Explain the

Significance when r = 0 and r = 1

8. Ten participants in a contest are ranked by two judges as follows X 1 6 5 10 3 2 4 9 7 8 y 6 4 9 8 1 2 3 10 5 7

Calculate the rank correlation coefficient? 9. The two regression equations of the variables x and y are and

. Then find mean of x? 10. Explain briefly the main characteristic of finite queuing system

---

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 42

10. DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN

10.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Code : A2EC19 - MLR16

Course Title : Digital Logic Design

Course Structure : Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits

3 1 - 3

Course

Coordinator : Mr.Rayala Sateesh

Team of

Instructors : N.Vasudeva Reddy, Sravan, T.Kalyani

Course Overview: This course provides in-depth knowledge of switching theory and the design techniques of digital circuits, which is the basis for design of any digital circuit. Such digital ciruits may be strictly combinational logic, in which their output state is only a function of the present state of their inputs; or may also contain sequential elements, where the present state depends on the present state and past states; in that sense, sequential circuits are said to include "memory" of past states. Switching circuit theory is applicable to the design of telephone systems, computers, and similar systems. This course is presented to students by power point projections, lecture notes, course handouts, Assignments, Objective and subjective tests.

10.2 PREREQUISITE(S):

Level Credits Periods /

Week Prerequisites

UG 3 3

Number systems, Digital logic

design, Concepts of state

machines using flipflops.

10.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End Exam

Marks

Total Marks

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective typetests. The subjective test is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour. Subjective test of each semester shall contain 4 questions;

75 100

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 43

the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. The objective type test is for 10 marks with duration of 20 minutes. It consists of 10 multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the studenthave to answer all the questions and each carry half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion. Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

10.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S.No. Component Duration Marks

1. I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

2. I Assignment - 05

3. II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

4. II Assignment - 05

5. External Examination 3 hours 75

Course Objectives:

i. Discuss the basic techniques for the design of digital circuits and fundamental concepts

used in the design of digital systems.

ii. Describe the common forms of number representation in digital electronic circuits and to

be able to convert between different representations.

iii. Discuss the combinational circuit’s using simple logical operations.

iv. Discuss combinational logic circuits, sequential logic circuits.

v. Illustrate the concepts of sequential circuits , enabling students to analyze sequential

systems in terms of state machines

vi. Explore the techniques to implement synchronous state machines using flip-flops.

10.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

I. Able to understand the basic digital logic fundamentals such as numbering systems,

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 44

binary codes and Boolean algebra.

II. Able to Understand the basic building blocks of digital systems like gates and

minimization of Boolean expressions using K-map method

III. Able to Implement any Digital Logic fuction using different logic gates

IV. Able to understand the concept of sequential circuits

V. Able to Design counters with the knowledge of combinational and sequential circuits.

VI. Able to Design the state diagrams with the knowledge of Mealy and Moore circuits and

algorithmic state machines for binary multipliers.

10.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed:

S. No. Outcome Level Proficiency

assessed by

A. An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering to solve Electronics and communications engineering problems.

H Assignment

s

B. An ability to design and conduct engineering experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data. H

Assignments

C. An ability to design and construct a hardware and software system, component, or process to meet desired needs, within realistic constraints.

S --

D. An ability to function on multi – disciplinary teams. H

Designing Exercises

E. An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems. S Designing

F. An understanding of professional, social and ethical responsibility N --

G. An ability to communicate effectively. N --

H. The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context. S

Prototype Models

I. An ability to recognize the need for and an ability to engage in life – long learning. N --

J. An ability to gain knowledge of contemporary issues.

S

Document Preparation, Presentation

K. An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice. S

Assignments

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 45

L. Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.

H Assignment

s

M. The use of current application software’s; the design and use of circuits; and the analysis, design, testing, and documentation of Analog and Digital circuits for the use in Communications engineering.

H Presentation

N. The basic knowledge of electronics, electrical components, computer architecture and applications of microcomputer systems, communications needed in data transport.

H Assignment

s

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 46

10.7 SYLLABUS

UNIT - I DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND BINARY NUMBERS: Digital systems, binary numbers, number base conversions, octal and hexadecimal numbers, complements, signed binary numbers, binary codes, error detection and error correction codes. BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES: Basic definitions, axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra, basic theorems and properties of Boolean algebra, Boolean functions, canonical and standard forms, other logic operations, digital logic gates.

UNIT - II GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION: The k-map method, four-variable map, five-variable map, product of sums simplification, don’t-care conditions, NAND and NOR implementation, determination and selection of Prime Implicants, Essential and Non essential prime Implicants. UNIT - III

COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS: Design procedure, Binary Adder, Binary Subtractor, Binary Multiplier, Magnitude Comparator, Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers, and Demultiplexers. UNIT - IV SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC: Sequential circuits, latches, flip-flops, analysis of clocked sequential circuits, State reduction and assignment, design procedure. REGISTERS AND COUNTERS: Registers, shift registers, ripple counters, synchronous counters, counters with unused states, ring counter, Johnson counter. UNIT - V MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC: Introduction, Random access memory, memory decoding, error detection and correction, read only memory, programmable logic array, programmable array logic, sequential programmable devices.

TEXT BOOKS: 1. M. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti (2008), Digital Design, 4th edition, Pearson Education

Inc, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Zvi. Kohavi (2004), Switching and Finite Automata Theory, Tata McGraw Hill, India. 2. C. V. S. Rao (2009), Switching and Logic Design, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, India. 3. Donald D. Givone (2002), Digital Principles and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, India 4. Roth (2004), Fundamentals of Logic Design, 5th Edition, Thomson, India.

10.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 47

Outcomes.

Lecture Course Learning Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference

No.

1-4 Understand bse conversion methods and arithmetic operations

Introduction to digital systems, base conversion methods binary and decimal ,octal and hexadecimal

T1

5-6 Understand the importance of complementation of numbers.

Complements of Numbers:1’s complement Complements of Numbers:2’s complement

T1

7-8 Identify the different types of Codes- Binary Codes T1

Binary and decimal codes Signed binary numbers

9-10 Understand Unit Distance Codes& Alpha Numeric Codes

Error Correcting Codes T1

Error Detecting Codes Error Detecting Codes

11-13 Identify Error Correcting Codes

T1

and Properties of theorems Basic Theorems and Properties, Switching Functions

14-16 Understand the difference between Canonical and Standard Form and importance of universal gates

Canonical and Standard Form,Algebraic Simplification of Digital Logic, Gates,Properties of XOR Gates, Universal Gates

T1

17-18 Understand Multilevel NAND and NOR realizations

Multilevel NAND realizations Multilevel NOR realizations

T1

19-21 Problems on base conversions Tutorial, class test.

T1

22-25 Learn the different types of k-maps

The Minimization with theorem The Karnaugh Map Method Five Variable Maps, Six Variable Maps

T1

26-28 Understand Prime and Essential Implications and tabular methods

Prime and Essential Implications, Don’t Care Map Entries Using the Maps for Simplifying Tabular Method

T1

29-30 Learn the Implementations of gates

NAND and NOR implementation

T1

31-33

Understand the Design procedure of combinational circuits Arithmetic Circuits.

Design the Combinational circuits of Arithmetic Circuits.

T1

34-36 Designing of combinational Decoders, Encoders, comparators, T1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 48

circuits Multiplexers, De-multiplexers

37-39 Designing on combinational circuits

Tutorial, Class test T1

40-41 Identify the difference between combinational and sequential circuits and Learn basic concepts of sequential circuits.

Introduction, Basic Architectural Distinctions between Combinational and Sequential circuits, The Binary Cell, Fundamentals of Sequential Machine Operation, The Flip-Flop

T1

42-43 Understand the flip-flops and their importance.

The D-Latch Flip-Flop, The “Clocked T” Flip-Flop, The “ Clocked J-K” Flip-Flop

T1

Design of a Clocked Flip-Flop

44 Understand State Diagram using sequential circuits.

Introduction, State Diagram Analysis of Synchronous Sequential Circuits

T2

45-47 Learn different Approaches to the Design of Synchronous Sequential Finite State Machines

Approaches to the Design of Synchronous Sequential Finite State Machines

T2

48-49 Describe Design Aspects and State Reduction

Design Aspects, State Reduction T2

50 Learn the Realization using Flip-Flops and design of counters

Realization using Flip-Flops Counters - Design of Single mode Counter

T2

51 Understand Finite state machine-capabilities and limitations

Finite state machine-capabilities and limitations

T2

52-53 Learn the concepts of Mealy and Moore models

Mealy and Moore models T2

54-58 Understand the different types of Counters and their applications

Ripple Counter, Ring Counter, Shift Register, Shift Register Sequences, Ring Counter,Johnson counter.

T2

59 Implement different types of flip-flops and counters

Tutorial Class test T2

60 Understand the Programmable logic devices

Introduction, T2

61-64 Understand the behavoiur of memory

Random access memory, memory decoding, read only memory

T2

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 49

65 Understand the correction of codes

error detection and correction T2

66 Understand the different logic devices

programmable logic array, programmable array logic, sequential programmable devices

T2

67-69 Understand Different PLA’s

and PAL’s Tutorial, Class test T2

10.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcome

s

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K K M N

1 2 3 4 5

10.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

code II-I SEMESTER

Digital Logic Design

A B C D E F G H I J K L

M N

A2EC19 CO1:Able to understand the basic digital logic fundamentals such as numbering systems, binary codes and Boolean algebra.

CO2: Able to Understand the basic building blocks of digital systems like gates and minimization of Boolean expressions using K-map method

CO3: Able to understand the concept of sequential circuits

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 50

CO4: Able to Design counters with the knowledge of combinational and sequential circuits.

CO5: Able to Design the state diagrams with the knowledge of Mealy and Moore circuits and algorithmic state machines for binary multipliers.

10.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. Gray code belongs to the class a.) Cyclic codes b.) Reflected codes c.) Both d.) None 2. Which of the following are Self Complementary 1.) (6,4,2,-3) 2.) (2,4,2,1) 3.) (8,4,2,1) 4.) (3,3,2,1) a.) 1&2 b.) 3 c.) 1,2&4 d.) 1&3 3. Excess-3 of BCD is obtained by adding ______ to BCD code a.) 1100 b.) 0011 c.) 1001 d.) 0110 4. For a code to be error detecting, the minimum distance between two successive code words is a.) zero b.) five c.) two d.) infinity 5. The number of k parity digits need to satisfy the inequality a.) 2k ≥ m+k-1 b.) 2k ≥ m+k c.) 2k ≥ m+k+1 d.) 2k ≥ m-k 6. 23+44+14+32=223. What would be the base of the above system a.) b=3 b.) b=4 c.) b=5 d.) b=5 7. 8421 and Excess-3 are a.) Weighted b.) Reflective c.) Alphanumeric d.) sequential 9. Binary equivalent of gray number 1110 is a.) 1011 b.) 1010 c.) 1100 d.) 0101 10.1010P; for odd parity p=? a.) 0 b.) 1 c.) both d.) none 11Even parity hamming code for 1101 a.) 1100110 b.) 1001100 c.) 1010110 d.) 1010101 12. FACE16 to binary a.) 1111011101001 b.) 1111101011001110 c.) 11111111100001 d.) 0111100000000110 13. (0.4375)10 to binary a.) 0.0011 b.) 0.10010 c. 0.0111 d.) 11.0011 14. (10011.11)2 = X16; X=? a.) A.C b.) 13.A c.) C.12 d.) 13. C 15. (1431)8 = (?)10 a.) 793 b.) 344 c.) 391 d.) 395 16.11001101.0101 = (?)8

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 51

a.) 315.22 b.) 315.24 c.) 410.22 d.) 344.26 UNIT-II

1. The main theorem that is being applied in the K-map simplification is

a. Demorgan’s theorem

b. Consensus theorem

c. Combining theorem, Aa+Aa1=A

d. None

2. The number of calls in a 4 variable K-map is

a. 4 b. 16 c. 8 d. 3

3. For each cell, number of adjacent cells in a 4 variable K-map is

a. 2 b. 4 c. 3 d. 8

4. Which of the following code is used in K-map for representing the minterms

a. 8421 b. BCD c. Excess-3 d. Gray code

5. The minterm corresponding to decimal number 13 is

a. ABCD b. A+B+C1+D c. A1+B+C+D d. AB C1D

6. Six variable function contain_______ number of cells in a K-map

a. 64 b. 32 c. 16 d. 8

7. What is the decimal position of the minterm A1B1C1D1 in the K-map

a. 2 b. 0 c. 15 d. 14

8. If f(A,B,C,D)=1 then the K-map contains _________ number of logic 1’s is

a. 4 b. 8 c.16 d. 32

9. In Tabular method, two terms from adjacent groups are combinable if their binary

representation differs by a ______ digit in the same position

a. Single b. Two c. Four d. None

10. In a tabular method the minimal expression of a function contains _________

a. Only prime implicants

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 52

b. Prime implicants and essential prime implicants

c. Only essential prime implicants

d. All variables

11. In a 4 variable K-map, the function contains all minterms, then the minimal expression is

_

a. A b. 1 c. 0 d. Don’t care

12. Looping a pair of adjacent 1’s in a K-map eliminates _________ number of variables

a. 1 b. 2 c. N d.n-1

13. In a n-variable K-map, after looping a quad of adjacent 1’s, the resultant term contains

____________

a. 1 b. 2 c. N-1 d. N-2

14. The given maxterm is A+B+C, its equivalent binary represented is

a. 101 b. 010 c. 111 d. 000

15. The given maxterm is A+B+C, its equivalent binary represented is

a. 101 b. 010 c. 111 d. 000

16. A function F(A,B,C) contains minterms 1,2,3,5,6,7, its complement contains

a. Σm (0,4) b. Σm(1,2,3,5,6,7) c. ПM (1,2,3,5,6,7) d. ПM (0,4)

UNIT-III

1. Flipflop is a ______ element.

a.storage b.memory c.both d.none 2. In a SR FF, if S=R=1 __________.

a.0 b. 1 c.toggle d. Is not permitted 3. In a JK FF if J=K=1, its Q output will be _________ when clock pulse is applied.

a.Q b.Q1 c.0 d.1 4. Master slave configuration is used in a JK FF to eliminate ________

a.toggling b.clock c.preset d.race around 5. In a T FF, The Q output _______ when T=0 and clock pulse is applied.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 53

a.0 b.1 c.toggles d.does not change 6. The tabulation specifying inputs required for a FF to change from the present state to a

specified next state is known as __________

a.truth table b.excitation table c.both d. None 7. The basic memory element in a digital circuit

a)consists of a NAND gate b)consists of a NOR gate c)is a flipflop d)all of the

above 8.A flip flop can store a)one bit of data b)two bits of data c)three bits of data d)any number of bits of data

9.The characteristic equation of a JK flipflop is______________ 10.In sequential circuits the present input depends on___________.

UNIT-IV

1. The number of flip-flops required for decade counter is

a)3 b)4 c)5 d)10 2. The maximum number that can be obtained by aripple counter using five flip-flops is a)32 b) 5 c) 16 d)31 3. In a counter circuit consisting of four J-k flip-flpos,all the flip-flops get triggered simultaneously. This counter circuit a) is a combinational circuit b) is an asynchronous circuit c) is a synchronous circuit d) may be a combinational or a sequential circuit. 4. The design of a clocked sequential circuit requires a) the state reduction b)the state assignment c)the design of next state decoder d)all of the above. 5. A sequential circuit with ten states will have a)10 flip-flops b) 5 flip-flops c) 4 flip-flops d) 0 flip-flops 6. in a sequential circuit design, state reduction is done for designing the circuit with a ) a minimum number of flip-flops b) a minimum number of gates c) a minimum number of gates and memory elements d)none of the above 7. for a design finite state machine K-maps can be used for minimizing the a) excitation expressions of flip-flpos b) number of flip-flops c) output logic expression d) excitation and output logic expression 8. a finite state machine a)is the same as a cocked sequential circuit b) consist of combinational logic circuits only c) consist of electrical motors. d) does not exist in practise 9. the number of director arcs eliminating from any state in a state diagram is

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 54

a)2n,where n is number of inputs b) independent of the number of inputs c) an arbitrary number d) 2n,where n is number of flip-flops 10. the number of directed arcs terminating on any state of a state diagram is a) 2n,where n is number of inputs b) 2n,where n is number of flip-flops in the circuit c) independent of number of inputs d) dependent on the number of output UNIT-V

1.ASM can be implemented using flipflops and ___________ circuits. 2.The moore type of outputs are represented inside the ___________ in an ASM chart. 3.Unconditional outputs are _________ type. 4.The data processind path is commonly referred to as the ______________ path. 5.A row in the state table is the same as a ______________ in an ASM chart. 6.Mealy type of outputs are ________________ 7.Moore type of outputs are______________ 8.An ASM chart can be implemented using flipflops and _______________ 9. _________ types of outputs are referred to as unconditional outputs.. 10.A path through an ASM block from entry to exit is referred to as a_____________

10.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

OBJECTIVES To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial - I

1 Discuss about number system the number system and their conversions.

synthesis (Level-6) 1

2 Prove all the Boolean algebra expressions.

Evaluate (Level-5) 2

3

Simplify the following Boolean functions to minimum number of literals: i. ( a + b )’ ( a’ + b’ )’

ii. y(wz’ + wz) + xy

Analyzing (Level-4) 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 55

4 Test the following Hamming code sequence for 11 bit message and correct it if necessary (1010010111 01011).

Analyzing (Level-4) 2

5 Develop three possible ways to express the function F = A 1B1D1+ A1B1C1D1 + A1BD + ABC1D with eight or less literals.

Applying (Level-3) 1

UNIT-II

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial - II

1 Simplify the function using Karnaugh map method

F (A,B,C,D) =Σ(4,5,7,12,14,15)+Σd(3,8,10).

Analyzing (Level-4) 3

2 solve the given function using tabular minimization method F(A,B,C,D)=П(0,1,3,4,5,6,7,8,9)+d(10,11,12,13,14,15).

synthesis (Level-6) 3

3

Develop a combinational circuit is specified by the following two Boolean functions Design the circuit with a decoder and basic gates.

F = Σ m (1,5,9,15) G = Σm (0,1,9,10,12)

Applying (Level-3) 2

4 Explain the schematic circuit for a BCD-to-decimal decoder. Give the truth-table for the same.

Evaluate (Level-5) 2

5 simplify the following function using K- map and implement it in AOI logic as well as NOR logic F= ПM(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7)

Analyzing (Level-4) 3

UNIT-III

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial - III

1 Develop the logic diagram of a SR latch using NOR gates. Explain its operation using excitation table.

Applying (Level-3) 5

2 Determine the characteristic equation for the complement out put of a JK flipflop is Q′ (t + 1) = J ‘Q′ + kQ.

Evaluate (Level-5) 5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 56

3 Discuss about the FF’s and their truth tables and excitation tables. synthesis (Level-6) 5

4 Simplify master slave JK FF Analyzing (Level-4) 5

5 Construct T-FF using JK Applying (Level-3) 5

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial - IV

1 Build the logic diagram of a 4 bit binary ripple counter using positive edge triggering.

Applying (Level-3) 2

2 By analyzing a shift register, how do you obtain a circular shift? Analyzing (Level-4) 2

3 Determine MOD-6 counter using T-FF Evaluate (Level-5) 2

4 Function the terms 1.State diagram 2.State reduction

Analyzing (Level-4) 2

5 Discuss the following 1. Jhonson counter 2. Ripple counter

synthesis (Level-6) 2

UNIT-V

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial - V

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 57

1 Explain about Random access memory Evaluate (Level-5) 4

2 Discuss how the memory is decoded synthesis (Level-6) 5

3 Assume the codes and explain the error correction and detection Analyzing (Level-4) 5

4 Explain the read and write control in read only memory Evaluate (Level-5) 5

5 Explain the different types of programmsble logic devices Evaluate (Level-5) 5

10.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Assignment - I

1 Build and Convert(2598.675)10 to hexadecimal Applying

(Level-3) 1

2 Classify and Subtract 101011 from 111001 using 2’s complement method

Analyzing (Level-4) 1

3 Deduct and Perform decimal addition in 8-4-2-1 BCD 24 +18 Evaluate

(Level-5)

1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 58

4 Modify and Minimize the Boolean expression (A+B+C’)(A+B’+C’)(A’+B+C’)(A’+B’+C’)

synthesis (Level-6) 1

5 Deduct and Convert(2AC5.D) to decimal,octal and binary

Evaluate (Level-5) 2

UNIT-II

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Assignment - II

1 Simplify the following boolean function by using a prime implicant method F(A,B,C,D)= ∑m(0,2,3,6,7,8,10,12,13)

Analyzing (Level-4) 3

2 Decide and reduce the following function using K-map technique f(A,B,C,D)=∑m(0,7,8,9,10,12)+∑d(2,5,13)

Evaluate (Level-5)

3

3 Select and implement the following Boolean functions using

decoder and OR gates:F1(A,B,C,D)=∑(2,4,7,9) F2(A,B,C,D)=∑(10,13,14,15).

Applying (Level-3) 3

4 Design full-adder using two half adders synthesis

(Level-6) 3

5 Design 4-bit parallel adder and subtractor with example. synthesis

(Level-6) 2

UNIT-III

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Assignment - II

1 conclude the difference between latch and flipflop Evaluate

(level-5) 5

2 Examine the ckt diagram of 4 bit ring ring counter using D flipflops and explain its operation with the help of bit pattern.

Analyzing (Level-4)

5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 59

3 solve the transition table for the following flip flops i)RS flip flop ii) J-K flip flop iii)T flip flop

Applying

(Level-3) 5

4 Determine and convert SR flipflop to JK flipflop and design the cricuit.

Evaluate

(level-5) 4

5 Discuss different types of triggering leve Synthesis (level-6) 5

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Assignment - IV

1 Design mod-5 synchronous counter using J-K FF Synthesis (level-6)

2

2 Compare synchronous and Asynchronous counter. Evaluate

(level-5) 2

3 Explain Ring counter using shift register.

Evaluate (level-5)

2

4 Build the synchronous sequential circuits? Design synchronous modulo-10 counter using D flip-flop .

Applying (Level-3)

5

5

Analyze the state table for the following state diagram

Analyzing (Level-4)

2

UNIT-V

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 60

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Assignment - V

1 Explain about Random access memory Evaluate (Level-5)

5

2 Explain how the memory is decoded synthesis (Level-6) 5

3 Assume the codes and explain the error correction and detection Analyzing (Level-4)

5

4 Explain the read and write control in read only memory Evaluate (Level-5) 5

5 Explain the different types of programmable logic devices Evaluate (Level-5) 5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 61

11. ELECTRONIC DEVICES (A2EC70)

11.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Code : A2EC70 – MLR16

Course Title : ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Course Structure : Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits

3 1 - 3

Course

Coordinator : Dr.Sankit Kassa, Assoc.Professor

Team of

Instructors : Dr.Sankit Kassa, Assoc.Professor

11.1 Course Overview:

This course covers fundamental topics that are common to a wide variety of electronic engineering devices and systems. The topics include an introduction to semiconductor devices and their applications. The course creates the background in the physics of the compound semiconductor-based electronic devices and also prepares students to advanced courses in electronics. This course provides a basis for students to continue education by undertaking advanced study and research in the variety of different branches of semiconductor device applications

11.2 PREREQUISITE(S):

Level Credits Periods /

Week Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Physics of Semiconductors

11.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End Exam

Marks

Total Marks

There shall be two mid tem examinations. Each Mid-term exam consists of subjective type and objective type test. The subjective test is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour. Subjective test of each semester shall contain four questions; the student has to answer two out of them. Each carrying 5 marks The objective test paper Is prepared by JNTUH,

75 100

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 62

which consists of 20 questions each carrying 0.5 marks and total of 10 marks. The student is assessed by giving two assignments, one, after completion of 1to 2 1/2 units and the second, after the completion of 2 1/2 to 5 units each carrying 5 marks. On the total the internal marks are 25. The average of two internal tests is the final internal marks. The external question paper is set by JNTUH consisting of part –A and part- B. Where part consists of short answer questions carrying total marks of 25 and part part-B consists of 5 essay type questions consists of internal choice each carrying 10 marks and the total of 50. The total external marks are 75.awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

11.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S.No. Component Total

Duration

Descriptive

Duration

Objective

Duration Marks

1. I Mid Examination

90 minutes 70 minutes 20 minutes 20

2. I Assignment - - - 05

3. II Mid Examination

90 minutes 70 minutes 20 minutes 20

4. II Assignment - - - 05

5. External Examination

3 hours 75

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the dynamics of electrons and the principle of operation of CRO and its

applications.

2. To understand the physics of semiconductor electronic devices, the characteristics and their

equivalent models.

3. To understand the mechanism of flow of current through the p-n junction and relating this

phenomena to the characteristics and operation of the diodes, bipolar and unipolar

transistors.

4. To understand the internal working of the regulated power supply which includes

characteristic parameters of rectifiers with and without filters using Zener regulation.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 63

5. To understand the concept of biasing in BJT and JFET so as to able to analyze advanced

electronic circuits.

11.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1. To apply the operating knowledge of major electronic devices like amplifiers, oscillators &

advanced analog circuits to identify, formulate & solve Engineering problems by making use

of modern software/hardware tools.

2. Student can have the knowledge of internal physical behavior of electronic devices.

3. Student can understand how to design and analyze various rectifiers, filter circuits.

4. Able to design an amplifier circuit with proper biasing techniques (BJT and FET).

5. Student can learn about Field effect transistor (FET) and oscillators analyze mosfet

characteristics which are

useful to design analog and digital circuits.

11.6 Program Outcomes are Assessed:

S.

No. Outcome Level

Proficiency

assessed by

A.

An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals to the conceptualization of engineering models (Fundamental Engineering Analysis

Skills).

H Assignments,

Exercises

B. An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as analyze and interpret the data (Information retrieval skills).

H Hands on Practice Sessions

C.

An ability to design, implement and evaluate an electronics & communication engineering based system, component are process to meets desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability and sustainability (Creative

Skills).

S Lab Sessions

D. An ability to function effectively as an individual and as a member or a leader in multidisciplinary teams (Team Work).

N Group

Discussions

E.

An ability to identify, formulate and apply appropriate techniques, resources and to solve complex electronics & communication engineering problems (Engineering Problem

Solving Skills).

H Design

Exercises

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 64

F. An understanding of professional ethics and responsibilities of engineering practice (Professional Integrity).

N --

G.

An ability to communicate effectively on complex electronics and communication engineering activities with the engineering community and society at large such as writing effective reports and making effective presentations (Communication

Skills).

N

Seminars, Document Preparation

and Presentation

H. Understanding of the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental and societal context (Engineering impact assessment skills).

N Discussions

I. An ability to engage in life-long learning and an understanding of the need to keep current of the developments in the specific field of practice (Continuing education awareness).

S Seminars

Discussions

J. Knowledge of contemporary issues like increased use of portable devices, rising health care costs and etc. which influence engineering design (Social awareness).

S Workshop,

Mini Projects, Prototypes

K.

An ability to use current techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary to analyze electronics & communication engineering practice (Practical engineering

analysis skills).

H

Design Exercises, Seminars,

Paper Presentations

L. An ability to apply creativity in design and development of electronic circuits, equipment, components, sub-systems and systems (Software and Hardware Interface).

S

Design Exercises,

Development of Prototypes, Mini Projects

M.

An ability to recognize the importance of professional developments by pursuing post graduate studies or facing competitive examinations that offer challenging and rewarding careers in designing (Successful Career and Immediate

Employment).

S Exams,

Discussions

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related 11.7 SYLLABUS

UNIT - I PN JUNCTION DIODE: Operation of PN junction Diode: No bias, forward bias and reverse bias, diode current equation (qualitative treatment), volt-ampere (V-I) characteristics, temperature dependence of V-I characteristics, ideal versus practical diode, static and dynamic resistances, diode equivalent circuits, breakdown mechanisms in semiconductor diodes, zener diode characteristics. UNIT - II RECTIFIERS AND FILTERS: PN junction as a rectifier, half wave rectifier, Center-Tapped

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 65

full wave rectifier, Bridge full wave Rectifier, Harmonic components in a rectifier circuit, Capacitor filter and Inductor filter. UNIT - III BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR (BJT): BJT construction, operation, symbol, transistor current components, input &output characteristics of a transistor in CB, CE and CC configurations TRANSISTOR BIASING AND STABILIZATION: Need for biasing, operating point, DC and AC load lines, stability factor, fixed bias circuit, collector to base bias circuit, self bias circuit. UNIT - IV BJT AMPLIFIERS: Operation of CE amplifier, Operation of RC coupled amplifier, Operation of Class-A power amplifier, Operation of Class-B Push-Pull power amplifier FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR: Junction field effect transistor (construction, principle of operation, symbol), volt-ampere characteristics of JFET, MOSFETS (construction, principle of operation, symbol), volt- ampere characteristics of MOSFETS in enhancement and depletion modes.

UNIT - V FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS: Feedback concepts, types of feedback circuits (block diagram representation), general characteristics of negative feedback amplifier OSCILLATORS: Barkhausen criterion, RC Phase shift oscillator using BJT, General form of LC oscillators, Hartley oscillator, Colpitts oscillator and Crystal oscillator. TEXT BOOKS: 1. J. Millman, Christos C. Halkias (2008), Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw

Hill, New Delhi. 2. R.L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky (2006), Electronic Devices and Circuits, 9th edition,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Rober T. Paynter (2003), Introduction to Electronic Devices and Circuits, 6th edition,

Pearson Education, New Delhi, India. 2. S. Salivahana, N. Suresh Kumar, A. Vallavaraj (2008), Electronic Devices and Circuits, 2nd

edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 11.8 COURSE PLAN:

S.No Topic Bloom’s Level Session Objectives

Teaching

Methodology

Lec

No.

Date

Plan

ned

&

Cond

ucted

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 66

UNIT-1: P-N Junction Diode:

1. Introduction

L1

2. Introduction to Semiconductors

Remember To analyze the doping process and apply this process for metals also.

CHALK&TALK

L2

3. Qualitative Theory of P-N Junction,

Understanding

To analyze the formation of p-n junction diode and apply this knowledge for special diodes

CHALK&TALK

L3,4

4. P-N Junction as a Diode,

Applying

To analyze the operation of p-n junction diode in both forward and reverse biases To find the biasing condition of p-n junction diode in different circuits

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ar7xDMR4P_U.time:4 mins.

L5,6

5. Diode Equation,

Applying

To derive the equation for current in a diode To find the current in a diode in different atmospheric conditions

CHALK&TALK L7,8

6. Volt-Ampere Characteristics

Analyzing

To analyze the voltage and current of a diode To calculate the static and dynamic resistances ,cut-in voltage and peak inverse voltage

CHALK&TALK

L9

7. Temperature dependence of VI characteristic

Analyzing

To analyze the dependence of temperature on V-I characteristics To apply this knowledge on CHALK&TALK embedded systems

CHALK&TALK

L10

8.

Ideal versus Practical – Resistance levels (Static and Dynamic),

Analyzing To compare the resistances of ideal and practical diodes

CHALK&TALK L11

9. Diode Equivalent Circuits, Load Line Analysis,

Applying To solve the problems by using diode equivalent circuits

L12

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 67

To find the currents and voltages in a circuit using load line analysis

CHALK&TALK

10.

Breakdown Mechanisms in Semiconductor Diodes, Zener Diode Characteristics.

Understanding

To analyze the break down mechanism in a semiconductor diode To analyze the zener diode characteristics Apply this knowledge in voltage regulators

CHALK&TALK

L13,14

UNIT-2: Rectifiers and Filters

11. The P-N junction as a Rectifier

Evaluating

To Understand the principle and characteristics of a rectifier To analyze how the pn junction diode works as a rectifier

CHALK&TALK

L15

12. Half wave Rectifier Understanding

To analyze the operation of p-n junction diode as a half wave rectifier To derive for efficiency of halfwave rectifier along with different parameters and analyzing the limitations of HWR

CHALK&TALK

L16

13

Full wave Rectifier Understanding

To analyze the operation of p-n junction diode as a full wave rectifier To understand the advantages, limitations of FWR with respect to HWR

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LtvGPqd7yo time:2:23mins L17

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 68

14 Bridge Rectifier Understanding

To analyze the operation of p-n junction diode as a Bridge rectifier Apply this knowledge to design a practical ac to dc converter

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rF0WMlH8BBk time:3:25mins L18,19

15 Inductor Filters Understanding

To understand the function of filter and derive for different characteristics for inductor filter To apply this knowledge and analyse the limitations in designing ac to dc converter s using inductor filters

CHALK&TALK

L20

16 Capacitor Filters, Understanding

To derive for different characteristics for capacitor filter To apply this knowledge and analyse the limitations in designing ac to dc converter s using capacitor filters

CHALK&TALK

L21

UNIT-3: Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT)

17

The Junction Transistor, Transistor Current Components,

Applying

To know the classification and formation of the junction transistor along with transistor biasing To understand the current components in transistor for both NPN,PNP transistors and able to understand how junction transistor controls the current

CHALK&TALK

L22,23

18 Transistor as an Amplifier,

Applying

Able to understand the basic function of an amplifier To Know the practical applications where the amplifier is used

CHALK&TALK L24

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 69

19

Transistor Construction, BJT Operation, BJT Symbol,

Understanding

To know the construction and operation of BJT Able to know the materials used for construction along with doping levels

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9CrcRabTQ0s time:4:55mins

L25

20 Common Base Configuration

Understanding

To understand different characteristics for common base configuration To apply this knowledge in designing common base amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L26

21

Common Emitter and Common Collector Configurations

Understanding

To understand different characteristics for common emitter,collector configuration To apply this knowledge in designing common emitter,collector amplifiers

CHALK&TALK

L27,28

22

Comparison of CB, CE, and CC Amplifier Configurations,

Analyzing

To compare amplifier characteristics for all the configurations To understand the limitations of all these configurations in designing of an amplifiers

CHALK&TALK

L29

23

Need for Biasing And stabilization against variations in VBE and β

Applying

To understand the need for biasing and stabilization of transistor To understand how biasing and stabilization effects the operation of transistor

CHALK&TALK

L30

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 70

24 Operating Point, The DC and AC Load lines,

Remembering

To study and analyze dc load line and ac load line and how the operating point can be set in different positions of dc and ac load lines Apply this knowledge to understand the operation of amplifiers

CHALK&TALK

L30,31

25 Bias Stability, Stabilization Factor

Applying

To derive the stability factor To apply this knowledge for all the biasing configurations

CHALK&TALK

L32

26 Fixed Bias Understanding

To draw and analyse a fixed bias method and derive for its stability factor To apply this knowledge and analyse the stability issues in amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L33

27 Collector Feedback Bias

Understanding

To draw and analyse a collector feedback bias method and derive for its stability factor To apply this knowledge and analyse the stability issues in amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L34,35

28 Emitter Feedback Bias,

Understanding

To draw and analyse a emitter feedback bias method and derive for its stability factor To apply this knowledge and analyse the stability issues in amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L36

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 71

29 Collector - Emitter Feedback

Understanding

To draw and analyse a collector feedback bias method and derive for its stability factor To apply this knowledge and analyse the stability issues in amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L37,38

30 Voltage Divider Bias

Understanding

To draw and analyse a collector feedback bias method and derive for its stability factor To apply this knowledge and analyse the stability issues in amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L39

UNIT-4: BJT AMPLIFIERS AND FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR

31

Operation of CE amplifier, Operation of RC coupled amplifier

Creating

To understand the operation of CE amplifier and Operation of RC coupled amplifier Apply this knowledge to design for RC coupled amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L40

32

Operation of Class-A power amplifier, Operation of Class-B Push-Pull power amplifier

Understanding

To understand the Operation of Class-A power amplifier and Operation of Class-B Push-Pull power amplifier Apply this knowledge to design for class-A and class B Push-Pull power amplifiers

CHALK&TALK

L41,42

33

The Junction Field Effect Transistor (Construction, principle of operation symbol)

Creating

To study The Junction Field Effect Transistor construction and operation Apply this knowledge in digital circuits in computers

CHALK&TALK

L43

34 Pinch-off Voltage - Volt-Ampere characteristics

Applying To understand the JFET under applied bias and analyse the drain

L44

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 72

JFET characteristics To understand the JFET amplifier as a voltage controlled device

CHALK&TALK

35 MOSFET(Construction, principle of operation, symbol)

Creating

To study The MOSFET construction and operation Apply this knowledge to understand the digital CMOS logic

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DquJSQasWG0 time:1min

L45

36

volt- ampere Characteristics of MOSFET in Enhancement and Depletion modes.

Evaluating

To study MOSFET Characteristics in Enhancement and Depletion modes Apply this knowledge in VLSI Design

CHALK&TALK https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=noyDy3F6Rx0 time:5mins L46

UNIT – V: FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS

37 Feedback concepts, types of feedback circuits

Creating

To study the Feedback concepts, types of feedback circuits Apply this knowledge to understand the feedback concepts and types of feedback circuits

CHALK&TALK

L47

38

general characteristics of negative feedback amplifier

Analyzing

analyse the characteristics of negative feedback amplifier To understand the characteristics of negative feedback amplifier

CHALK&TALK

L48,49

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 73

Signature of Faculty

Signature of HOD

39

Barkhausen criterion, RC Phase shift oscillator using BJT

Applying

To understand the Barkhausen criterion, RC Phase shift oscillator using BJT To understand the RC Phase shift oscillator using BJT

CHALK&TALK

L50

40 General form of LC oscillators, Hartley oscillator

Analyzing

To analyze the operation of LC oscillators and Hartley oscillator Apply this knowledge to design a practical LC and Hartley oscillator

CHALK&TALK L51,52

41

Colpitts oscillator and Crystal oscillator.

Analyzing

To analyze the operation of Colpitts oscillator and Crystal oscillator. Apply this knowledge to design a Colpitts oscillator and Crystal oscillator.

CHALK&TALK

L53,54

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 74

11.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

I

II

III

IV

V

11.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1

2

3

4

5

11.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. A Zener diode works on the principle of

(a) Tunneling of charge carriers across the junction

(b) Thermionic emission

(c) Diffusion of charge carriers across the junction

(d) Doping of charge carriers across the junction

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 75

Ans: a 2. In Gunn diodes electrons are transferred from

(a) High to low mobility energy bands

(b) Low to high mobility energy bands

(c) Valley to domain formation

(d) Domain to valley formation

Ans: b 3. Schottky diodes, also called hot carrier diode, are used in wave shaping circuit because

(a) They have a small recovery time

(b) They have a large reverse resistance

(c) They have large forward current

(d) Their peak inverse voltage is small

Ans: a 4. Silicon diode is less suited for low voltage rectifier operation because

(a) It can withstand high temperatures

(b) Its reverse saturation current is low

(c) Its cut-in voltage is high

(d) Its breakdown coltage is high

Ans: d 5. Silicon is not suitable for fabrication of light emtting diodes because it is

(a) An indirect band gap semiconductor

(b) A direct band gap semiconductor

(c) A wide band gap semiconductor

(d) A marrow band gap semiconductor

Ans: b

6.A general purpose diode is more likely to suffer avalanche breakdown than Zener breakdown because

(a) It is lightly doped

(b) It’s leakage current is small

(c) It has weak covalent bonds

(d) It has low reverse resistance

Ans: a 7.A Zener diode (a) Has a high forward voltage rating

(b) Has a sharp breakdown at low reverse voltage

(c) Is useful as an Amplifier

(d) Has a negative resistance

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 76

Ans: b 8.Avalanche breakdown in a semiconductor diode occurs when (a) Reverse bias exceeds a certain value

(b) Forward bias exceeds a certain value

(c) Forward current exceeds a certain value

(d) The potential barrier is reduced to zero

Ans: a 9.Zener breakdown results from (a) Strong electric field

(b) High applied potential

(c) Any other cause

Ans: a 10.The important advantage of tunnel diode is (a) It is less sensitive to nuclear radiation

(b) It is less noisy

(c) It can be operated safely at high temperatures

(d) None

Ans: b 11.The temperature coefficient of a breakdown diode based on Avalanche breakdown is (a) Positive

(b) Negative

(c) Zero

(d) None

Ans: a

12.Which of these is the best description of a Zener diode (a) It operates in the reverse region

(b) It is a constant voltage device

(c) It is a constant current device

(d) It works in forward region

Ans: b 13.When two Zener diodes of each 10V and 15V are connected in series aiding, the overall voltage between them when they are in conduction is (a) 10.6v

(b) 15.6v

(c) 25v

(d) Zero

Ans: c

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 77

14.In a standard regulator circuit using Zener diode 10v the input voltage varies from 25 to 40v and load current is 10mA to 20mA, the minimum Zener current is 5mA, the value of the series resistance in ohms (a) 1500

(b) 1200

(c) 600

(d) 1000

Ans: c 15.The LED’s are usually made of materials like (a) Ga and As

(b) C and Si

(c) Ge and As

(d) P ans Si

Ans: a 16.Varactor diodes are used in FM receivers to obtain (a) Automatic frequency control

(b) Automatic gain control

(c) Automatic volume control

(d) Automatic noise control

Ans: a

17.No load voltage of power supple is 100v and full load voltage is 80v, the percentage regulation is (a) 0

(b) 25

(c) 20

(d) 2.5

Ans: b 18.Both Avalanche and Zener breakdown are commonly known as (a) Zener breakdown

(b) Avalanche breakdown

(c) Current breakdown

Ans: a 19.Zener diodes are used as (a) Reference voltage elements

(b) Reference current elements

(c) Reference resistance

Ans: a

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 78

20. Zener diodes are

(a) Specially doped P-N junction

(b) Normally doped P-N junction

(c) Lightly doped P-N junction

Ans: a

UNIT-II

1. D.C voltage in half-wave rectifier is less than that of full wave rectifier-yes/no 2. A.C. Voltage in half-wave rectifier is less than that of full wave rectifier-yes/no 3. The ripple factor in half wave rectifier with ideal diode is _____________1.21

4. The ripple factor in full wave rectifier with ideal diode is _____________0.48

5. The peak inverse voltage across the diode in half wave rectifier is_______vm 6. The peak inverse voltage across the diode in full wave rectifier is_______2vm

7. The peak inverse voltage across each diode in bridge rectifier is _________vm

8. The rectification efficiency of full wave circuit with ideal diodes is______80.1% 9. If vm =24v in full wave rectifier,vrms is______16.97v 10. If vm =24v in half wave rectifier,vdc=________7.64v 11. If vm=12v in full wave rectifier,vdc=_________7.64v 12. No load means rl=0ohms-yes/no 13. No load means rl=infinityohms –yes/no 14. Full load means il=0-yes/no 15. Full load means il is highest –yes/no 16. The preferred rectifier is _________bridge rectifer 17. The advantage of bridge rectifier over a full wave rectifier is___________piv is vm 18. The main disadvantage of full wave rectifier over bridge rectifier is_____piv is 2vm 19. In full wave rectifier with pi section filter,vdc=______vm 20. If c1 and c2 are high in pi section filter ,ripple factor is also high_________yes/no

UNIT-III

1. How much is the base-to-emitter voltage of a transistor in the "on" state?

A. 0 VB. 0.7 VC. 0.7 mVD. Undefined

2. For what kind of amplifications can the active region of the common-emitter

configuration be used?

A.Voltage B. Current C. Power D. All of the above

3. In the active region, while the collector-base junction is ________-biased, the base-

emitter is ________-biased.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 79

A.forward, forward B.forward, reverse C.reverse, forward D.reverse, reverse

4. What range of resistor values would you get when checking a transistor for forward- and reverse-biased conditions by an ohmmeter?

A.100 to a few k , exceeding 100 k

B.Exceeding 100 k , 100 to a few k C.Exceeding 100 k , exceeding 100 k D.100 to a few k , 100 to a few k

5. Calculate minority current ICO if IC = 20.002 mA and IC majority = 20 mA.

A.20 µA B.0.002 µA C.2 nA D.2 µA

6. In which region are both the collector-base and base-emitter junctions forward-biased?

A.Active B.Cutoff C.Saturation

D.All of the above

7. What does a reading of a large or small resistance in forward- and reverse-biased conditions indicate when checking a transistor using an ohmmeter?

A. Faulty device

B. Good device C. Bad ohmmeter D. None of the above

8. Determine the value of when = 100.

A.1.01 B.101 C.0.99

D.Cannot be solved with the information provided

9. Which of the following can be obtained from the last scale factor of a curve tracer?

A.hFE B. dc C. ac

D. ac

10. dc = ________

A. IB / IE B. IC / IE

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 80

C. IC / IB

D. None of the above

11. What are the ranges of the ac input and output resistance for a common-base configuration?

A. 10 –100 , 50 k –1

M

B. 50 k –1 M , 10 –100 C. 10 –100 k , 50 –1 k

D. None of the above

12. What is the most frequently encountered transistor configuration?

A. Common-base B. Common-collector C. Common-emitter

D. Emitter-collector

13. Which of the following regions is (are) part of the output characteristics of a transistor?

A. Active B. Cutoff C. Saturation D. All of the above

14. For a properly biased pnp transistor, let IC = 10 mA and IE = 10.2 mA. What is the level of IB?

A. 0.2 A B. 200 mA C. 200

A

D. 20.2 mA

15. Which component of the collector current IC is called the leakage current?

A. Majority B. Independent C. Minority

D. None of the above

16. What is the ratio of the total width to that of the center layer for a transistor?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 81

A. 1:15 B. 1:150 C. 15:1 D. 150:1

17. dc for this set of collector characteristics is within ________ percent of ac.

A. 2

B. 5

C. 7

D. 10

18. Calculate dc at VCE = 15 V and IB = 30 A.

A. 100

B.116

C.50

D. 110

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 82

19. Calculate ac for IC = 15 mA and VCE = 5 V.

A. 200 B. 180 C. 220 D. None of the above

20. Use this table of collector characteristics to calculate ac at VCE = 15 V and IB = 30 A.

A. 100 B. 106 C. 50 D. 400

UNIT-IV

1. Calculate VCE.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 83

A. –4.52 V B. 4.52 V C. –9 V D. 9 V

2. For the BJT to operate in the active (linear) region, the base-emitter junction must be ________-biased and the base-collector junction must be ________-biased.

A.forward, forward

B.forward, reverse

C.reverse, reverse

D.reverse, forward

3. Determine the reading on the meter when VCC = 20 V, RC = 5 k , and IC = 2 mA.

A.10 V

B.–10 V

C.0.7 V

D.20 V

4. In a fixed-bias circuit, which one of the stability factors overrides the other factors?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 84

A.S(ICO)

B.S(VBE)

C.S( )

D.Undefined

5. Calculate the voltage across the 91 k resistor.

A. 18 V B. 9.22 V C. 3.23 V D. None of the above

6. Calculate the value of VCEQ.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 85

A.8.78 V

B.0 V

C.7.86 V

D.18 V

7. For what value of does the transistor enter the saturation region?

A.20

B.50

C.75

D.116

8. Which of the following is (are) related to an emitter-follower configuration?

A.The input and output signals are in phase.

B.The voltage gain is slightly less than 1.

C.Output is drawn from the emitter terminal.

D.All of the above

9. At what region of operation is the base-emitter junction forward biased and the base-collector junction reverse biased?

A.Saturation

B.Linear or active

C.Cutoff

D.None of the above

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 86

10. For an "on" transistor, the voltage VBE should be in the neighborhood of 0.7 V.

A. True B. False

11. Calculate ICsat.

A.35.29 mA

B.5.45 mA

C.1.86 mA

D.4.72 mA

12. Determine ICQ at a temperature of 175º C if ICQ = 2 mA at 25º C for RB / RE = 20 due to

the S( ) stability factor.

A.2.417 mA

B.2.392 mA

C.2.25 mA

D.2.58 mA

13. Which of the following currents is nearly equal to each other?

A.IB and IC

B.IE and IC

C.IB and IE

D.IB, IC, and IE

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 87

14. Which of the following voltages must have a negative level (value) in any npn bias circuit?

A.VBE

B.VCE

C.VBC

D.None of the above

15. Determine the values of VCB and IB for this circuit.

A.1.4 V, 59.7

A

B.–1.4 V, 59.7 A

C.–9.3 V, 3.58 A

D.9.3 V, 3.58 A

16. For the typical transistor amplifier in the active region, VCE is usually about ________ % to ________ % of VCC.

A.10, 60

B.25, 75

C.40, 90

17. The total time required for the transistor to switch from the "off" to the "on" state is designated as ton and defined as the delay time plus the time element.

A. True B. False

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 88

18. Calculate Rsat if VCE = 0.3 V.

A.49.2

B.49.2 k

C.49.2 m

D.49.2 M

19. The ratio of which two currents is represented by ?

A.IC and IE

B.IC and IB

C.IE and IB

D.None of the above

20. It is desirable to design a bias circuit that is independent of the transistor beta.

A. True B. False

UNIT-V

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 89

1)For an n-channel JFET having drain-source voltage constant if the gatesource voltage is increased(more negative) pinch-off would occur for:

a)High value of drain current b)saturation value of drain current c)Zero drain current d) gate current equal to drain current Ans:-(a)

2) For a UJT , if R1=resistance from emitter to the base 1,R2 = resistance from emitter to the base 2 and RBB=(R1+R2), then the instrinsic stand-off ratio is :

a)R1/R2 b)R1/RBB c)R2/R1 d)R2/RBB Ans:-(a) 3)For a junction Fet it the pinch off region as the drain voltage is increased, the drain current: a)Becomes Zero b)abruptly decreases c) abruptly increases d) remains constant Ans:- (a) 4) In modern MOSOFETs, the material used for the gate is: a) high purity silicon b) high purity silica

c)heavily doped polycrystalline silicon d)epitaxially grown silicon Ans:- (c)

5) the threshold voltage of an n-channel MOSFET can be increased by: a) increasing the channel dopant concentration b) reducing the channel dopant concentration c) reducing the gate oxide thickness d) reducing the channel length Ans:- (b) 6) An infrared LED is usually fabricated from:

a)Ge b)Si c) Ga, As d) Ga,As,P Ans: - c 7)An n-channel JFET has a pinch – off voltage of VP=-5V,Vds(max)=20V and gm=2mA/V. the minimum ‘ON’ resistance is achieved in r’th JFET for,

a) VGS=-7V and VDS=0V b) VGS=0V and VDS=0V c)VGS=0V and VDS=20V d) VFGS=-7V and VDS= 20V

Ans:- b 8) The JFET in the given current has an Idss=10mA and VP=5V. the value of the resistance Rs for a drain current Id= 6.4mA is : a) 150ohms b)470 ohms c)560 ohms d)1 Kilo-ohms 9) List 1 List2

a)voltage controlled device 1) Bipolar Junction transistor b)current controlled device 2)Unijunction transistor c) Conductance modulation device 3)Field effect transistor d) Negative conductance device 4)IMPATT diode

Ans :-A=3,B=1,C=4,D=2 10) In a JFET,transconductance gm is of the order of

a)1mS b)100mS c)1S d)100S Ans:- a 11) in a FET , dynamic drain resistance rd is the order of

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 90

a)1K ohms b)10K ohms c) 100 ohms d) 100K ohms Ans:- c 12) in a MOSFET ,dynamic drain resistance rd is of the order of

a)10K ohms b) 1k ohms c)10 ohms d)100k ohms Ans:- a 13) The input resistance rgs in small signal model of MOSFET is of the order of

a)100K ohms b)1M ohms c) 100M ohms d)10000M ohms Ans :- d

14) the feedback resistance rgd in small signal model of MOSFET is of the order of a)1M ohms b)100M ohms c)10000M ohms d)1000000M ohms Ans :- d 15)The feedback capacitance Cgd in small signal high frequency model of JFET is of the order of a)5pF b)5-pF c) 500pF d)1pF Ans :- a 16) The drain to source resistance Cds in high frequency model of a JFET is of the order of : a)1pF b) 10pF c)100pF d)1000pF Ans:-a 17)the gate to source capacitance Cgs in small signal high frequency model of a JFET of the order of a) 5pF b)50pF c)500pF d)5000pF Ans:- a 18) In an FET , trasconductance gm is proportional to a) Ids b)sqre of I DS c)sqre root I DC d) 1/I DC Ans :- c 19) In an FET, gm0 is proportional to : a) I dss b)sqre root I dss c)sqre of I dss d) 1/I dss

20) An infrared LED is usually fabricated from:

a)Ge b)Si c) Ga, As d) Ga,As,P

11.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

OBJECTIVES

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited.

In line with this, Faculty of MLR institute of technology, Hyderabad has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome based education in the process of problem solving and

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 91

career development. So, all students of the institute should understand the depth and approach of course to be taught through this question bank, which will enhance learner’s learning process. UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial– I

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

QUESTIONS 1 Define the term reverse recovery time of a diode Level2 A

2 Mention the type of two capacitive effects that could occur in a practical diode

Level2 A

3 Draw the symbol of an ideal diode and its corresponding v-i characteristics

Level3 A

4 What is the net flow of charge in a semiconductor diode when zero potential is applied across it

Level3 A

5 What did you understand with space charge in a diode Level2 A

6 What is the significance of dynamic resistance in diode? Explain how it can be computed?

Level2 A

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 92

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Describe in your own words the conditions established by forward and reverse bias conditions on a p-n junction diode and how the resulting current is affected

Level1 B

2. \With a relevant graph, explain the forward and reverse characteristics of a practical diode

Level2 B

3. Mention the differences between an ordinary diode and a zener diode

Level4 B

4. What did you understand by break-down region in diode, explain in detail

Level2 B

5. From the basics of an electronic charge, derive an expression of a diffusion capacitance of a diode

Level5 A

UNIT-II

S. No Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Tutorial– II

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1 What did you understand by peak inverse voltage (PIV) rating of a diode Level2 C

2 What is the essentiality and significance of series and parallel configuration of diodes

Level3 D

3 If the line frequency is 60 Hz, what is the output frequency of a half-wave rectifier

Level2 C

4 A diode is in series with 220 ohm, if the voltage across the resistor is 4 V. What is the current through the diode? Assume ideal diode

Level3 D

5 If the output filter capacitance is increased, what happens to the ripple content of output voltage?

Level3 D

6 The diodes in a bridge rectifier each have a maximum DC current rating of 2 A. What is the maximum value of a load current?

Level3 D

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Discuss in detail about the load-line analysis of a diode Level1 C

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 93

2. Draw the full-wave rectification diagram feeding R-load and draw output voltage waveform

Level4 C

3. Discuss, how zener diode can act as a voltage regulator? Level3 D

4. Discuss about the various filters, which can be employed in most of the power applications

Level3 C

5. A HWR circuit has a 25v(rms) sinusoidal are input and a 600Ω load resistance . caluculate the peak output voltage ,peak load current when Vf =0.7u

Level3

D

UNIT-III

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial– III SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1 In a cutoff region of output characteristics of a common-base transistor, which junctions are reverse biased.

Level1 E

2 Draw and explain the common emitter configuration of BJT Level2

E

3 What are Alpha (α) and Beta (β) in transistor terminology? Level3

E

4 A transistor has a current gain of 175. If the base current is 0.1 mA, what is the collector current?

Level1 E

5 What is the most commonly used transistor biasing configuration? Why?

Level1 E

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Discuss in detail about the load-line analysis of a diode Level1

C

2. Draw the full-wave rectification diagram feeding R-load and draw output voltage waveform

Level6 C

3. Discuss, how zener diode can act as a voltage regulator? Level4

D

4. Discuss about the various filters, which can be employed in most of the power applications

Level3 C

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 94

5. A HWR circuit has a 25v(rms) sinusoidal are input and a 600Ω load resistance . caluculate the peak output voltage ,peak load current when Vf =0.7u

Level3

D

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial– IV SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1 For linear amplification of BJT, the DC operating point should not be too close to the maximum power and voltage rating why?

Level2 F

2 Why the fixed bias configuration of transistor biasing arrangements is unstable?

Level2 F

3 Design a voltage divider bias network using a supply of 24 V, a transistor with a beta of 110, and an operating point of ICQ=4 mA and VCEQ=8V. Choose VE=1/8 VCC, Use standard values

Level2

F

4 What is the primary type of biasing used with discrete bipolar transistor circuits?

Level2 F

5 Write down important features with respect to stabilization of BJT against variations in ICO, VBE and β

Level2 F

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Explain in brief, how Q-point is determined from the device characteristics?

Level1 G

2. Write down the base current expression of BJT, when emitter is stabilized

Level1 G

3. Draw a voltage divider bias (VDB) circuit. Write down the procedure for calculating the collector emitter voltage. Why does this circuit have a very stable Q point?

Level1 G

4. Describe different kinds of biasing BJT? Level2 G

5. Discuss in brief about thermal runaway and thermal stability with respect to BJT biasing

Level2 H

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 95

UNIT-V LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Draw the circuite diagram of Hartley oscillator and explain its operation

Level2 H

2. Explain Feedback concepts, and compare types of feedback circuits

Level2 H

3. Explain the operation of LC oscillators Level2 H

4. Explain the Feedback concepts, types of feedback circuits Level2

H

5. Derive frequency oscillations in RC phase shift oscilltor Level1 H

11.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment– I

1 Explain about the transition capacitance Ct of a p-n junction diode. derive the expression for the same.

Level2 A

2 Derive the expression for the diffusion capacitance Cd of a p-n junction diode.

Level3 J

3 In the case of a forward biased p-n junction sketch the current components and explain about the same.

Level3 A

4 Explain the concept of holes and term mobility. Level2 A

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonom

y

Course Outcome

Tutorial– V SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1 Mention the advantages of JFET over BJT Level1 H

2 Explain the operation of LC oscillators Level2 H

3 Explain Feedback concepts, and compare types of feedback circuits

Level2 H

4 Explain Barkhausen criterion Level3 H

5 Compare different types of oscillators Level4 H

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 96

5 Explain about the tunneling phenomenon .explain how tunnel diode exhibits negative resistance characteristics.

Level1 J

6 Explain about zener breakdown mechanism .draw the V-I characteristics and explain the same .what are the applications of zener diode.

Level3 A

UNIT-II

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment – II

1 Draw a circuit diagrams to show two methods of producing a negative output voltage from a half wave rectifies briefly explain.

Level2 A

2

Draw the circuit diagram of a bridge rectifies to gather with its input waveforms. explain the operation of the circuit by identifying the forward biased and reverse biased diodes during each half cycle of the input waveform.

Level3

D

3 For a rectifier circuit with capacitor filtering, explain ripple voltage and diode peak reverse voltage.

Level3 D

4 Explain the function of a transformer in a dc power supply & discuss the factors involved in the specification of power supply transform.

Level2 E

5 Explain the operation of full wave rectifier with neat sketches Level1 A

UNIT-III

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment – III

1 With the help of bias voltages explain the function of pnp transistor. Level2 E

2 Explain the V-I characteristics of a common bias configuration circuit of a BJT.

Level3 F

3 Plot the V-I characteristics of a common emitter configuration of BJT and identify the three regions of transistor in the plot.

Level3 E

4 Explain briefly how a BJT can be used as a switch. Level2 G

5 Given βdc=180 and Ic=2.0mA, find IE and IB and Idc of BJT. Level1 E

6 Define carrier life time and base width modulation or early effect Level3 F

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 97

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment – IV

1 What are the factors affecting the stability factors of Q.point. Level2 G

2 Derive the expression for the stability of factor S of an BJT amplifier.

Level3 F

3 Determine the stability factor of a basic circuit. Level3 F

4 Derive the stability factor of a self bias circuit. Level2 F

5 Derive an expression for collector current ICi n cB configuration Level1 G

UNIT-V

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment – V

1 Compare different types of oscillators Level4 H

2

s.no 1

With the help circuit diagram explain crystal oscilltor Level5 H

3 Explain the operation of LC oscillators Level3 H

4 Explain Barkhausen criterion Level3 H

5 Explain the RC Phase shift oscillator using BJT Level3 H

S No Blooms applications Blooms levels

1 Remembering Level 1 2 Understanding Level 2 3 Apply Level 3 4 Analysis Level 4 5 Evolution Level 5 6 Design Level 6

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 98

12. COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION (A2CS06)

12.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Title COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION

Course Code A2CS06

Regulation MLR16

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

4 - - 4

Course Coordinator Mrs.G.ANITHA, Asst.Professor

Team of Instructors Mrs.G.ANITHA, Asst.Professor

12.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

This course introduces the principles of computer organization and the basic architecture concepts. The course emphasizes performance and cost analysis, instruction set design, pipelining, memory technology, memory hierarchy, virtual memory management, and I/O systems. It also deals with fundamentals of microprocessor, Assembly language programs. The main objective of this course is to examine how a computer operates at the machine level. It provides essential knowledge that is needed from engineering professionals to measure a simple PC performance. This course is presented to students by power point projections, lecture notes, course handouts, Assignments, Objective and subjective tests

12.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Basic Mathematics, Digital Logic Design,Basic Concepts of

Microprocessor

12.3. MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks University End

Exam Marks Total Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests. The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion. Assignment Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

75 100

12.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 99

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

2 I Assignment --- 5

3 II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

4 II Assignment ---- 5

5 External Examination 4 hours 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

I. Identify the basic components of computers.

II. Describe the factors involved in Instruction set architecture design.

III. Discuss the Input-Output organization in depth.

IV. Explore the memory Organization Techniques.

V. Discuss about different multiprocessor.

VI. Illustrate inter process communication in multi processors system.

12.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

Sl.No.

Course Objectives

Course Outcomes Blooms Level

6. Identify the basic components

of computers.

Able to Identify various components of computer and their interconnection

BL-2

7.

Describe the factors involved in

Instruction set architecture

design

Able to apply various concepts

of digital computer design and

can solve GATE examination

and university examination level

problems

BL-3

8.

Discuss the Input-Output

organization in depth.

Able to compare various

concepts and algorithms with

respect to performance issues.

BL-4

9.

Explore the memory

Organization Techniques.

Able to design RAM, Micro

programmed control unit for a

given specification

BL-5

10.

Discuss about different

multiprocessor.

Able to evaluate and select

suitable hardware for design of

various components of a CPU

BL-6

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL) BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply, develop BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

12.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 100

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematicalfoundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science andengineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-basedsystems to real-world problems (fundamental engineering analysisskills).

S Assignments,

Exams

b An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyzeand interpret data (information retrieval skills).

S Assignments,

Tutorials

c

An ability to design, implement, and evaluate a computer-basedsystem, process, component, or program to meet desired needs,within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social,political, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability(creative skills).

H Assignments,

Tutorials

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams(teamwork). S Lectures, Tutorials,

Problem solving

e An ability to analyze a problem, and identify, formulate and use theappropriate computing and engineering requirements for obtainingits solution (engineering problem solving skills).

H Lectures

f An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and socialissues and responsibilities (professional integrity).

N --

g An ability to communicate effectively, both in writing and orally(speaking /

writing skills). N --

h The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global impactof computing and engineering solutions on individuals,organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment skills).

S Lectures,

Motivation

i Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in continuingprofessional development and life-long learning (continuingeducation awareness).

H Assignments,

Tutorials, Exams

j A knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness). N --

k An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary forcomputing and engineering practice (practical engineering analysisskills).

N --

l An ability to apply design and development principles in theconstruction of software and hardware systems of varyingcomplexity (software hardware

interface). S Lectures

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional developmentby pursuing postgraduate studies or face competitive examinationsthat offer challenging and rewarding careers in computing(successful career and

immediate employment).

N --

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 101

COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION

B. Tech: IT II-I Semester L T P C

Course Code: A2CS06 3 1 - 3 Course Overview: This course introduces the principles of computer organization and the basic architecture concepts. The course emphasizes performance and cost analysis, instruction set design, pipelining, memory technology, memory hierarchy, virtual memory management, and I/O systems. Basic technical writing skills are also taught in this class

Course Objectives: I. To impart basic concepts of computer architecture and organization,

II. To explain key skills of constructing cost-effective computer systems. III. To familiarize the basic cpu organization. IV. To help students in understanding various memory devices. V. To facilitate students in learning IO communication

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course students will be able to : 1. Identify various components of computer and their interconnection 2. Identify basic components and design of the CPU: the ALU and control unit. 3. Compare and select various Memory devices as per requirement. 4. Outline the importance of Parallel processing 5. Compare various types of IO mapping techniques 6. Critique the performance issues of cache memory and virtual memory

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS: Computer types, Functional units, Basic operational concepts, Von-Neumann Architecture, Bus Structures, Software, Performance, Multiprocessors and Multicomputer, Data representation, Fixed and Floating point, Error detection and correction codes. REGISTER TRANSFER AND MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register Transfer Language, Register Transfer, Bus and Memory Transfers, Arithmetic Micro-Operations, Logic Micro-Operations, Shift Micro-Operations, Arithmetic logic shift unit. UNIT - II BASIC COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND DESIGN: Instruction codes, Computer Registers, Computer Instructions, and Instruction cycle. Timing and Control, Memory-Reference Instructions, Input-Output and interrupt. Central processing unit: Stack organization, Instruction Formats, Addressing Modes, Data Transfer and Manipulation, Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC), RISC vs CISC UNIT - III MICRO-PROGRAMMED CONTROL: Control Memory, Address Sequencing, Micro-Program example, Design of Control Unit. COMPUTER ARITHMETIC: Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication and Division algorithms, Floating-point Arithmetic Operations, Decimal arithmetic operations. UNIT - IV

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 102

MEMORY SYSTEM: Memory Hierarchy, Semiconductor Memories, RAM(Random Access Memory), Read Only Memory (ROM), Types of ROM, Cache Memory, Performance considerations, Virtual memory, Paging, Secondary Storage, RAID. UNIT – V

INPUT OUTPUT: I/O interface, Programmed IO, Memory Mapped IO, Interrupt Driven IO, DMA MULTIPROCESSORS: Characteristics of multiprocessors, Interconnection structures, Interprocessor Arbitration, Interprocessor Communication and Synchronization, Cache Coherence

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. Moris Mano (2006), Computer System Architecture, 3rd edition, Pearson/PHI, India.\

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, SafeaZaky (2002), Computer Organization, 5th edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, India. 2. William Stallings (2010), Computer Organization and Architecture- designing for performance, 8th edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersy. 3. Anrew S. Tanenbaum (2006), Structured Computer Organization, 5th edition, Pearson Education Inc, John P. Hayes (1998), Computer Architecture and Organization, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 103

12.8 COURSE PLAN: At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes

Lect.

No Course Learning Outcomes

Blooms

Level Topic to be Covered Ref.

1-4

Identify different types of instructionsand calculate their impact on performance of computer.

Apply [Level 3]

Instruction Formats, Comparison

T1:8-4

5-6 Explain different types ofaddressing modes used in an instruction.

Evaluate [Level 5]

Addressing modes with numerical Examples

T1:8-5

7-8 Explain program control instructions using status bit conditions

Understand

[Level 2]

Program control-status bit conditions

T1:8-7

9-12 Explaininterrupts andtheir impact on system performance.

Evaluate [Level 5]

Program interrupts, Types ofinterrupts

T1:8-7

13

Identify different ways of communicating with I/O devices andcompare standard input-output interfaces.

Apply [Level 3]

I/O vs. memory Bus, Isolated vs. memory-mapped I/O

T1:11-2

14- 20

Explainthe concept of Asynchronous transfers and modes oftransfer.

Understand

[Level 2]

Asynchronous data transfer, Asynchronous serial transfer, Modesof transfer

T1:11-3

21-23

Discuss aboutSpeed of transfer using DirectMemory Access technique.

Create [Level 6]

DMA T1:11-

6,R1:6-4

24-26

Identify Processor with Direct memory access capability and define Communication between CPU and IOP

Apply Level

3

Input-Output Processor(IOP),CPU-IOP,Intel8089IOP

T1:11-7, R1:6-9

27

Explain

asynchronouscommunication interface as both transmitter and receiver

Understand

[Level 2]

Asynchronous communication Interface

T1:11-3

28-35

Explain the memory hierarchy and the function of RAM and ROM chips along with Connection between CPU and Memory

Understa

nd [Level 2]

Memory Hierarchy, Main memory, RAM and ROM Chips, Memory connection to CPU

T1:12-2

36-38 Explain Page table by means ofassociative memory

Understa

nd Associative Memory

T1:12.4, R5:5.5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 104

[Level 2]

39-43

Identify methods for specifying where memory blocks are placed in cache.

Apply [Level

3]

Cache Memory, Data Cache, Instruction Cache, Miss and Hit ratio, Access time

44-47

Discuss the concept of virtual memory that involves defining address space and Memory space.

Create

Level 6

Virtual memory, Memoryaddress map

T1:12-6, R5:5.7

48-53

Explain the configuration of pin diagramand determine register organization with flag performance.

Evaluate [Level 5]

8086 CPU Pin Diagram, GeneralPurpose registers, Segment register, Flag register

T2: (1.1,1.2, 1.3,1.4)

54-57

Explain the performance improvement using pipelining

Understand

[Level 2] Concept of Pipelining

T2 (4.1,4.2)

58-60

Illustrate the specifications of AddressingModes

Explain [Level 2]

Addressing Modes of 8086

T2:(2.2)

61-62

Discuss about different instruction formats

Create [Level 6]

8086 Instruction formats T2:(2.1,2.

3)

63-64

Explain Assembly languageprogramming and various types of instructions provided by 8086

Evaluate [Level 5]

Assembly Language programs Involving Branch and call instructions

T2:(3.1,3.2)

65 Identify operations on arithmetic and Sorting techniques.

Apply [Level 3]

Sorting, evaluation of arithmeticExpressions

T2(3.3,3.4)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 105

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sno Unit Lno

.

Topic Session Objectives Text Methodology Data

Plann

ed

Date

Conduc

ted

1 I

L1 Objectives and Outcomes of the subject. Introduction to Computer Architecture and Computer Organizatin Types of Computers

Student will be able to understand the purpose of this subject and its scope.

T1 /Ch1 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to identify various types of computers

2 L2 Functional Units of a computer. Basic Operational Concepts. Von Neuman Architecture. Performance of computer

Student will able to identify the components of digial computer

T1 /Ch1 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to understand the operational concepts of computer

3 L3 Bus Structures Students will be able to classify the various types of buses.

T1 /Ch4 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to understand the bus arbitration issues

4 L4 Data Representation. Number systems. Fixed point and Floating point numbers

Student will be able understand the difference between fixed and floating point numbers.

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to perform number conversions

5 L5 Complements. Addition and subtraction using 2’s complement

Students will be able to understand the importance of complements

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to use 2’s complement method for addition and subtraction

6 L6 Other Codes. Gray Code,EBCIDIC,2421 codes etc.

Students will be able to identify all types of weighted and non weighted codes

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to convert binary to gray conversion and vice versa.

7 L7 Error Detection Codes Students will be able to use parity bit to detect error in data transmission

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk PPT

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 106

Students will be able to identify the limitations of parity bit codes.

Animation

8 I

L8 Error Correction Codes Students will be able to use hamming code to detect erroreneous bits

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk PPT

Students will be able to understand the limitations of hamming code.

9 L9 Error Correction Codes Students will be able to use hamming code to detect erroreneous bits

T1 /Ch3 Chalk & Talk PPT Animation

Students will be able to understand the limitations of hamming code.

10 L10 Register Transfer Language Notation. Bus and Memory transfers

Students will be able to understand the notation of register transfer language

T1 /Ch4

Students will be able to differentiate bus and memory transfers.

11 L11 Micro operations and types of micro operations

Students will be able to identify various types of micro operations

T1 /Ch4 PPT

Students will be able to understand the importance of logic operations.

12 L12 Micro Operations Students will be able to identify various types of micro operations

T1 /Ch4 PPT

Students will be able to understand the importance of logic operations.

13 II

L13 Computer Registers and Instruction codes Students will be able to understand the various types of registers

T1 /Ch5 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to identify instruction codes

14 L14 Instruction code and instruction cycle Students will be able to understand instruction cycle

T1 /Ch5 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to analyze phases of instruction cycle

15 L15 Timing and Control. Memory Reference Instructions

Students will be able to know the imporantance of a timer and control signal

T1 /Ch5 Chalk & Talk PPT Animation

Students will be able to demonstrate various memory reference instructions.

16 L16 Input Output. Interrupt Students will be able to understand the meaning of an interrupt and its types

T1 /Ch5 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to analyze the process of handling an interrupt

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 107

17 L17 Central Processing Unit. Hypothetic computer.

Students will be able to analyze how a cpu will function

T1 /Ch8 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to identify various operations that are involved in executing an instruction.

18 L18 Central Processing Unit. Hypothetic computer.

Students will be able to analyze how a cpu will function

T1 /Ch8 PPT

Students will be able to identify various operations that are involved in executing an instruction.

19 L19 Instruction Formats Students will be able to identify various instruction formats

T1 /Ch8 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to select suitable instruction format based on the CPU design

20 L20 Addressing Modes Students will be able to understand all addressing modes.

T1 /Ch8 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to identify and select appropriate addressing mode for a given operation.

21 L21 RISC vs CISC Students will be able to differentiate RSIC and CISC architectures.

T1 /Ch8 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to select either RISC or CISC machine based on the requirement.

T1 /Ch8 Chalk & Talk

22 III L22 Designing Control Unit. Hardwired control Unit

Students will be able to understand what is control unit and its design issues

T1 /Ch7 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to understand hardwired control and its limitations.

23 L23 Control memory Students will be able to undertsand control funcion and control signal.

T1 /Ch7 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to appreciate control memory

24

L24 Address Sequencing Students will be able to understand the address sequencing logic

T1 /Ch7 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to identfiy the key elements of address sequencing circuitary

25 L25 Micro Programmed Control Unit Students will be able to understand the behavior of a micro programmed control unit.

T1 /Ch7 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to design a micro

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 108

III

programmed control unit 26 L26 Micro Programmed Control Unit Students will be able to understand the

behavior of a micro programmed control unit. T1 /Ch7 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to design a micro programmed control unit

27 L27 Computer Arthmetic. Multiplicaton algorithm

Students will be able to understand multiplication logic inside a computer

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to use multiplication algorithm

28 L28 Booth’s Algorithm Students will be able to understand Booth’s algorithm

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to apply Booth’s algorithm for 2’s complement multiplication.

29 L29 Booth’s Algorithm Students will be able to understand Booth’s algorithm

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to apply Booth’s algorithm for 2’s complement multiplication.

30 L30 Division Algorithm Students will be able to understand how division is carried out inside a computer

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to apply division alogorithm on binary data

31 L31 Division Algorithm Students will be able to understand how division is carried out inside a computer

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to apply division alogorithm on binary data

32 L32 Floating point arithmetic operations Students will be able to understand normlaization

T1 /Ch10 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to perform arithmetic operatins on floating point data.

33

L33 Memroy Hierarchy Students will be able to differentiate various memory devices.

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to locate memory devices

34 L34 Semi conductor memories. RAM memory addressing

Students will be able to understand the construction of memory units using capacitors and flip flops

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to study and analyze the way data is stored in memory units

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 109

35 IV

L35 ROM Students will be able to understand the importance of read only memory

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to classify various types of ROM.

36 L36 Cache Memory Students will be able to undertsand the need to improve performance

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to apply locality of reference concept for effective usage of cache memory

37 L37 Mapping techniques Students will be able to differentaite vairous mapping techniques

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk Animation

Students will be able to solve GATE level problems on mapping techniques.

38 L38 Cache Performance considerations Students will be able to compute the performance of cache

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to anlayze the perfromance issues of cache

39 L39 Virtual Memory Students will be able to understand the need for virtual memory.

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to apply virtual memory concept to improve perfromance of their computers.

40 L40 Paging and Demand Paging Students will be able to apply paging technique

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to differentiate paging and demand paging.

41 L41 Segmentation Students will be able to apply segmentation technique

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to differentiate paging and segmentation

42 L42 Secondary Storage HDD Students will be able to understand auxillary storage media.

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to solve GATE Level problems on HDD

43 L43 Secondary Storage HDD Students will be able to understand auxillary storage media.

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to solve GATE Level problems on HDD

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 110

44 L44 RAID

Students will be able to understand the importance of redundancy

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to state merits and demerits of RAID

45 L45 RAID levels Students will be able to understand various RAID levels.

T1 /Ch12 Chalk & Talk

Students will be able to analyze each RAID Level

46 V

L46 Introduction to IO Interface Student will be able to understand the need for an I/O interface

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to differentiate various I/O controllers and drivers.

47 L47 I/O vs Memory Bus Student will be able to understand the communication between I/O bus and memory bus

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to differentiate 3 types of memory and I/O bus communications

48 L48 Isolate I/O, Memory Mapped I/O Student will be able to use isolated I/O and memory mapped I/O

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to demonstrate merits and demerits of both I/O techniques.

49 L49 Interrupt Driven I/O Student will be able to understand interrutp driven I/O

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to analyze how CPU cycles can be saved in Interrupt driven I/O

50 L50 Direct Memory Access Student will be able to understand DMA transfers

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk Animation

Student will be able to analyze the performance using DMA over other I/O

51 L51 Characteristics of Multiprocessors and inter connection structures

Student will be able to understand various architectures

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to analyze pros and cons of various architectures.

52 L52 Inter processor arbitration Student will be able to understand how T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk Animation

Student will be able to analyze how processors gain control and share memory.

53 L53 Inter processor arbitration Student will be able to understand how T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk Student will be able to analyze how

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 111

processors gain control and share memory. 54 L54 Inter Processor Communication and

Synchronization Student will be able to analyze how mutliple processor communicate and synchronize each other.

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk Animation

Student will be able to apply mutex and hardware locks.

55 L55 Cache Coherence Student will be able to understand the coherence problem

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to solve GATE level cache coherence problems

56 L56 Cache Coherence Student will be able to understand the coherence problem

T1 /Ch11 Chalk & Talk

Student will be able to solve GATE level cache coherence problems

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 112

12.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Program Outcomes

a b c d E f g h i j k l m

i S S H S

Ii S H S S

iii H S S iv S S S S S

v S S S S

vi S S S S=Supportive H=Highly Related

12.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes Program Outcomes

a B C d e f g h i j k l m

A. S S

B. H

C. S H S D. S S

E. S

F. H

G. H S S H. S

I. S

J. H S S K. S

L. H S

M. S

N. H S

O. H S P. S H

Q. H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 113

12.11 OBJECTIVE BITS

UNIT-1 1. Consider the following sequence of micro-operations. MBR <- PC

MAR <- X

PC <- Y

Memory <- MBR

Which one of the following is a possible operation performed by this sequence? A. Instruction fetch B. Operand fetch C. Conditional branch D. Initiation of interrupt service Ans: D

2. The smallest integer that can be represented by an 8-bit number in 2’scomplement form

is_________________

A. -256 B. -128 C. -127 D. 0 Ans: - B

3. A RAM chip has a capacity of 1024 words of 8 bits each (1K × 8). The number of 2 × 4 decoders with

enable line needed to construct a 16K × 16 RAMS from 1K × 8 RAM is______________ A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7 Ans: B

4. In multiple Bus organization, the registers are collectively placed and referred as ______. A. Set registers B. Register file C. Register Block D. Map registers Ans: C

5. The ISA standard Buses are used to connect______________, A. RAM and processor B. GPU and processor C. Hard disk and Processor D. CD/DVD drives and Processor Ans: C

6. The main advantage of multiple bus organization over single bus is____________ A. Reduction in the number of cycles for execution B. Increase in size of the registers C. Better Connectivity D. None of these Ans: A

7. RISC Processors discouraging which control unit A. Hardwired B. Micro Programming C. both D. none Ans: B

8. A static pipeline is specified by ______________ reservation table whereas thedynamic pipeline is

specified by _______________ reservation tables A. one, more than one B. one, one C. more than one, more than one D. more than one, one Ans: A

9. Assume that the time required for the 5 functional units which operate in each of the 5 cycles are:

10ns, 8ns,10ns, 10ns and 7ns. Assume that the pipelining adds 1 ns of overhead.The speedup vs the

single data path is___________________ A. 4.1 times B. 4.5 times C. 4.8 times

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 114

D. 3.7 times Ans: A

10. The method for updating the main memory as soon as word is removed from the cache is

called_________________ A. Write-through B. Write - back C. Protected write D. Cache Write Ans: B

11. __________ is the bottleneck, when it comes computer performance.

A. Memory access time B. Memory cycle time C. Delay D. Latency Ans: B

12. The minimum time delay between two successive memories read operations is ______.

A. Cycle time B. Latency C. Delay D. None of the above Ans: Cycle Time

13. The decoded instruction is stored in ______ .

A. IR B. PC C. Registers D. MDR Ans: A

14. The instruction -> Add LOCA, R0 does____________,

A. Adds the value of LOCA to R0 and stores in the temp register B. Adds the value of R0 to the address of LOCA C. Adds the values of both LOCA and R0 and stores it in R0 D. dds the value of LOCA with a value in accumulator and stores it in R0 Ans: C

15. ____________registers can interact with the secondary storage A. MAR B. PC C. IR D. R0 Ans: A

16. Which of the register/s of the processor is/are connected to Memory Bus ?

A. PC B. MAR C. IR D. Both a and b Ans: B

17. ______ is used to choose between incrementing the PC or performing ALU

operations. A. Conditional codes B. Multiplexer C. Control unit D. None of these Ans: B

18. _______ is used to store data in registers.

A. D flip flop

B. JK flip flop

C. RS flip flop

D. none of these

Ans: A 19. The addressing mode which makes use of in-direction pointers is ______ .

A. Indirect addressing mode B. Index addressing mode

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 115

C. Relative addressing mode D. Offset addressing mode Ans: A

20. The addressing mode, where you directly specify the operand value is _______ . A. Direct B. Immediate C. Definite D. Relative Ans: B

UNIT II 1. The address of I/O device is communicated using______________

A. Data Buses B. Data Lines C. Address Bus D. Status Line Ans: B

2. _________command is used to activate the peripheral and to inform it what to do

A. Control command B. Status command C. Data input command D. Data output command Ans: A

3. In asynchronous data transfer, both sender and receiver accompany____ control signal

A. Strobe B. Handshaking C. Two wire control D. Single wire control Ans: B

4. _________ is used to test various status conditions in the interface and peripheral

A. Control command B. Status command C. Data input command D. Data output command

Ans: B

5. _____________mapping uses different address space for memory and I/O A. Memory mapped I/O B. Isolated I/O C. Independent I/O D. Interrupt driven I/O Ans: B

6. The rate at which serial information is transmitted and is equivalent to the data transfer in bits per

second is__________ A. Baud rate B. Bit rate C. Control rate D. Strobe rate Ans: A

7. In the following which uses separate controller for data transfer________

A. Programmed I/O B. Interrupt initiated I/O C. DMA D. All the equally efficient Ans: C

8. In polling the drawback is__________ A. Cost is more complex B. Hardware required C. Time consuming D. Maintenance is more Ans: C

9. Continously monitoring I/O devices is done in___________

A. Programmed I/O B. Interrupt initiated I/O

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 116

C. DMA D. Memory mapped I/O

Ans: C

10. The DMA controller acts like___________

A. Primary cache B. CPU C. Cache memory D. Router Ans: B

11. The number of basic I/O commands in IBM 370 computer IOP is_________ A. 50 B. 6 C. 80 D. 40 Ans: B

12. The number of basic I/O commands in Intel 8089 computer IOP is______ A. 50 B. 6 C. 80 D. 40 Ans: A

13. The Intel 8089 I/O processor contains the IC package of________

A. 64 pins B. 40 pins C. 16 pins D. 32 pins Ans: B

14. A processor with DMA capability that communicates with I/O devices is______

A. Input Output Processor B. Data Communication processor C. Data communication D. Input Output programmer Ans: A

15. The I/O processor in IBM 370 computer is called__________

A. Router B. Channel C. Device D. Modem

Ans: A

16. Which of the following architectures represents the organization of a computer containing a single

control unit, a processor unit and a memory unit__________ A. SIMD B. MISD C. SISD D. MIMD

Ans: CD

17. Interfaces to memory and I/O devices are made through___________

A. Central switch B. Buses C. Data Links D. All of the above Ans: B

18. I/O command type___________

A. Read B. Control C. Test D. All of the above

Ans: C

19. The techniques for data transfer not involving the processor__________

A. Direct Memory Access B. Programmed I/O C. Memory mapped I/O D. All of the above Ans: A

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 117

20. In an Interrupt- driven I/O, when an interrupt is detected, details on the current processor condition

is stored in_____________________

A. Return Address Register B. Program Counter C. Program status word D. Memory bank Ans: A

UNIT III

1. __________ is the bottleneck, when it comes computer performance.

A. Memory access time B. Memory cycle time C. Delay D. Latency Ans: B

2. The minimum time delay between two successive memory read operations is ______. A. Cycle time B. Latency C. Delay D. None of the above Ans: A

3. A memory organization that can hold up to 1024 bits and has a minimum of address lines can be

organized into_____________ A. 128 x 8 B. 256 x 4 C. 512 x 2 D. 1024 x1 Ans: D

4. The number of external connections required in 16x8 memory organization is________

A. 14 B. 19 C. 15 D. 12 Ans: A

5. The larger memory placed between the primary cache and the memory is called____

A. Level 1 cache B. Level 2 cache C. EEPROM D. TLB Ans: B

6. The effectiveness of the cache memory is based on the property of ________.

A. Locality of reference B. Memory localization C. Memory size D. None of the above Ans: A

7. The spatial aspect of the locality of reference mean__________________

A. That the recently executed instruction is executed again next B. That the recently executed wont be executed again C. That the instruction executed will be executed at a later time D. The instruction in close proximity of the instruction executed will be executed in future Ans: D

8. The techniques which move the program blocks to or from physical memory is called

as___________________

A. Paging B. Virtual memory organization C. Overlays D. Framing Ans: B

9. The binary address issued to data or instructions are called as ______. A. Physical address B. Location C. Reloadable address D. Logical address Ans: D

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 118

10. The type of control signal are generated based on__________________

A. contents of the step counter B. Contents of IR C. Contents of condition flags D. All of the above Ans: Contents of IR

11. The program is divided into operable parts called as _________.

A. Frames B. Segments C. Pages D. Sheets Ans: B

12. Bootstrap loader requires

A. RAM

B. ROM

C. any memory

D. processor Ans: B

13. In memory hierarchy, the following memory has least capacity

A. Register B. Cache memory C. Main Memory D. Magnetic tape Ans: A

14. The part of the computer system that supervises the flow of information between Auxiliary

Memory and Main Memory is called A. Processor Management System B. Data Management System C. Address Management System D. Memory Management System

Ans: D 14. Existence of two or more programs in different parts of the Memory Hierarchy at the same time is

defined as:

A. Unit programming

B. Multi programming C. Multi-processing D. Unit processing Ans: A

15. If Cache Access time is 100ns, Memory access time is 1000ns, if the hit percentage is 100%, what is

the Average access time

A. 100

B. 1000 C. 1100 D. 10 Ans: A

16. If both Cache Memory and Main Memory are updated for a write operation, the type of the Cache

Memory is called

A. Write-back B. Write-through C. Associative D. TLB Ans: B

17. If only Cache location is updated during a Write operation as long as there is no replacement, the

type of the Cache Memory is called

A. Write-back B. Write-through C. Associative D. TLB Ans: A

18. Replacing the block that has been not used for the longest period of timeis

A. FIFO B. LRU C. MRU D. LFU

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 119

Ans: B 19. Replacing the page that entered the Memory at first is

A. FIFO B. LRU C. MRU D. LFU Ans: A

UNIT-IV 1. Intel 8086 has_____________

A. 2 –byte queue

B. 4-byte queue

C. 6 byte queue

D. 8 byte queue Ans: C

2. Semiconductor memory has memory cell

A. Slow

B. fastest

C. lowest

D. highest Ans: A

3. ________________is a 16-bitmicroprocessor?

A. Intel 8085

B. Intel 8086

C. Zilog0

D. Motorola6800 Ans: B

4. Address bus of Intel 8085is bit wide

A. 2

B. 4 C. 8 D. 16 Ans: C

5. The first microprocessor is______________

A. Intel 3003

B. Intel 4004

C. Intel 5005

D. Intel6006 Ans: B

6. The was the first hand held calculator to perform transcend dental functions

A. HP-32 B. HP-33 C. HP-34 D. HP-35 Ans: D

7. technology has allowed us to put a complete CPU on a single chip

A. LSI

B. MSI

C. VLSI

D. SSI Ans: C

8. Example of embedded computer system is

A. personal computer

B. fax machine

C. printer

D. keyboard Ans: B

9. Modern processors can execute one instruction per clock cycle

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 120

A. RISC B. CISC C. RISK D. CISK Ans: A

10. Access time is faster for________________

A. ROM

B. RAM

C. SRAM

D. DRAM Ans: D

11. The conditional branch instruction JNS performs the operations when if

A. ZF =0

B. SF=0

C. PF=0

D. CF=0 Ans: B

12. SOD pin can drive a Dflip-flop?

A. SOD cannot drive any flip-flops.

B. SOD cannot drive D flip-flop, but can drive any other flop-flops.

C. Yes, SOD can drive Dflop-flop. D. No, SOD cannot drive any other flop-flops except Dflop-flop. Ans: C

18. IDIV and DIV instructions perform the same operations for___________

A. Unsigned number

B. Signed number

C. Signed number & Unsigned number

D. None of above. Ans: A

19. The output of the following code AL=88 BCD, CL=49 BCD, ADD AL, CL DAA_______ A. D7,CF=1

B. 37, CF=1 C. 73, CF=1 D. 7D,CF=1 Ans: B

20. What is the output of the following code? AL= 49 BCD, BH= 72BCD

SUB AL,BH DAS

A. AL=D7, CF=1.

B. AL=7D,CF=1.

C. AL=77, CF=1

D. none of them. Ans: C

UNITV 1. In 8086, Example for Non mask able interrupts is_________

A. Trap

B. RST6.5

C. INTR Ans: A

2. What does microprocessor speed depends on_________

A. Clock

B. Data bus width

C. Address bus width Ans: C

3. Can ROM be used as stack?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 121

A. Yes B. No C. sometimes yes, sometimes no Ans: B

4. ______________processor structure is pipelined

A. all x80 processors

B. all x85 processors

C. all x86processors Ans: C

5. Address line for RST3is_______________ A. 0020H B. 0028H C. 0018H Ans: C

6. In 8086 the overflow flag is set when____________

A. The sum is more than 16bits

B. Signed numbers go out of their range after an arithmetic

operation C. Carry and sign flags are set D. During subtraction Ans: B

7. The symbols [ ]indicate__________

A. Direct addressing

B. Register Addressing

C. Indirect addressing

D. None Ans: C

8. BHE of 8086 microprocessor signal is used to interface the___________

A. Even bank memory B. Odd bank memory C. I/O d)DMA D. None Ans: B

9. In 8086 microprocessor, ________has the highest priority among all type interrupts.

A. NMI B. DIV 0 C. TYPE 255 D. OVERFLOW Ans: A

10. In 8086 microprocessor one of the following statements is not true.

A. Coprocessor is interfaced in MAX mode B. Coprocessor is interfaced in MIN mode C. I/O can be interfaced in MAX / MIN mode D. Supports pipelining

Ans: B

11. 8088 microprocessor differs with 8086 microprocessor in

A. Data width on the output

B. Address capability C. Support of coprocessor D. Support of MAX / MIN mode Ans: A

12. Address line for TRAPis_________________

A. 0023H B. 0024H

C. 0033H

Ans: B 13. IDIV and DIV instructions perform the same operations for_____________

A. Unsigned number B. Signed number C. Signed number & Unsigned number D. None of above Ans: B

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 122

14. The CMP instruction modifies the______________

A. program counter B. instruction register C. flags register D. segment register Ans: C

15. Conditional instructions typically inspect the____________ A. program counter B. instruction register C. flags register D. accumulator Ans: A

16. The BP register is typically used for accessing________________

A. Strings B. memory C. stack D. data segment Ans: D

17. What is the output of the following code AX = 37D7H, BH = 151decimal DIVBH

A. AL = 65H, AH= 94decimal B. AL= 5EH, AH= 101decimal C. AH= E5H,AL=5EH D. AL= 56H, AH=5EH Ans: B

18. In 8086 microprocessor one of the following instructions is executed before an arithmetic

operation A. AAM B. AAD C. DAS D. DAA Ans: B

19. Number of the times the instruction sequence below will loop before coming out of loop is MOV

AL,00h A1: INC AL JNZA1

A. 00 B. 01 C. 255 D. 256 Ans: D

20. What will be the contents of register AL after the following has been executed MOV BL,8CMOV

AL, 7E ADD AL,BL

A. 0A and carry flag is set B. 0A and carry flag is reset C. 6A and carry flag is set D. 6A and carry flag is reset Ans: A

12.12 TUTORIALQUESTIONS (Short Answer Questions))

S.No Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT –I

1. Define an instruction format? Explain different types of instruction formats in detail.

Knowledge 1

2. Explain different types of addressing modes with Suitable examples?

Understand 2

3. Define an interrupt? Explain Types of interrupts? Knowledge 3

4. Illustrate one-address and zero-address instruction formats, Apply 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 123

With Examples?

5. Explain i) Implied mode ii) Immediate Mode iii) Register Mode iv)Register indirect mode v) Direct addressing mode with Examples.

Understand 2

6. Explain different program control instructions in CPU? Understand 3

7. Discuss status bit conditions with Diagram? Understand 3

8. Explain conditional branch instructions? Understand 2

UNIT –II

1. Explain the DMA transfer technique with the block diagram?

Understand 7

2. Describe input-output-processor (IOP) Organization in detail?

Understand 6

3. Compare I/O versus Memory bus? Understand 6

4. Explain DMA Controller with the block diagram? Understand 7

5. Differentiate isolated I/O and memory mapped I/O? Understand 6

6. Discuss Strobe Control method of Asynchronous data transfer technique?

Understand 4

7. Explain Asynchronous communication interface with diagram?

Understand 4

8. Discuss various techniques used for Modes of Transfer? Understand 5

9. Explain 8089 Input-Output processor? Understand 7

UNIT -III

1. Explain briefly about memory hierarchy? Understand 8

2. Discuss RAM and ROM chips with diagrams? Understand 9

3. State and Explain virtual memory organization technique? Remember 10

4. Describe in detail about associative memory? Remember 8

5. Define cache memory? Explain Associative mapping technique?.

Remember 11

6. Define a mapping function? Explain Set-Associative mapping technique?

Remember 11

7. Explain i) ROM ii) PROM iii) EPROM iv)EEPROM. Understand 9

8. Explain virtual memory Address translation? Understand 10

9. Explain briefly about Memory connection to CPU? Understand 7

UNIT –IV

1 Explain the various addressing modes of 8086 with examples?

Understand 15

2 Explain difference between 8086 and8088? Apply 12

3 Explain what are the GPR & SPR registers in8086? Understand 13

4 Classify flag register in 8086 and explain flag instruction set?

Apply 13

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 124

5 Explain the functional block diagram of 8086and write about the functions of Each block?

Understand 13

6 Differentiate between physical address, effective address and offset address?

Apply 14

7 Describe and explain the minimum mode configuration of 8086 with read and Write cycles of timing diagram?

Apply 13

8 Describe pin diagram of 8086 and explain each pin? Apply 13

UNIT -V

1 Discuss the instructions formats of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

2 Explain Arithmetic instruction set of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

3 Explain data transfer instructions of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

4 Explain short notes on JUMP instructions with examples? Understand 17

5 Explain the following instructions i). WAIT ii). HLT iii). ESC iv).NOP.

Understand 17

6 Explain If AL contains A0H, what happens when the instruction CBW is Executed?

Understand 17

7 Differentiate jump & loop instructions? Apply 16

8 Explain short notes on string instructions? Understand 16

9 Identify the logical instructions available in8086? Understand 16

PART – B LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

S. No

Question Blooms

Taxonom

y Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT –I

1. Define an instruction format? Explain different types of instruction formats indetail.

Understand 4

2. Explain different types of addressing modes with Suitable examples?

Apply 4

3. Define an interrupt? Explain Types of interrupts? Apply 5

4. Illustrate one-address and zero-address instruction formats, With Examples?

Understand 4

5. Explain i) Implied mode ii) Immediate Mode iii) Register Mode iv) Register indirect mode v) Direct addressing mode with Examples.

Apply 4

6. Explain different program control instructions in CPU? Apply 5

UNIT -III

1. In many computers the cache block size is in the range 32 to 128 bytes. Discuss the main advantages and disadvantages of making the size of the cache blocks larger or smaller?

Understand

10

2. Define a mapping function? Explain Set – Associative mapping technique with Example?

Understand

10

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 125

3. Explain virtual memory Address translation with diagram? Understan

d 11

4.

Aneight-wayset-associativecacheconsistsofatotalof256blocks.The mainmemorycontains8192blocks,eachconsistingof128words.

Calculate number of bits in the main memory address?

Apply 10

5.

Calculate the number of page faults using Least Recently used(LRU) Page Replacement Algorithm for the following CPU References.

7 0 1 2 0 3 0 4 2 3 0 3 2 1 2 0 1 7 0 1 AssumeMainMemorycontains3frames.

Apply 11

6.

Calculate the number of page faults using First In First out(FIFO)Page Replacement Algorithm for the following CPU References. 3 4 5 6 4 7 4 0 6 7 4 7 6 5 6 4 5 3 4 5

Apply 11

UNIT –IV

1. Explain8086internalarchitecturewiththehelpofBIUandEU? Understan

d 13

2. Define arithmetic pipeline with an example? Understan

d 12

3. Explain about HOLD response sequence? Understan

d 14

4. ExplainMINIMUMandMAXIMUMmodesin8086? Understan

d 13

5. Differentiate8086with8085? Understan

d 12

6. Explain about interrupts in8086? Understan

d 12

UNIT -V

1. Describe the following instructions with examples? i)MUL ii)CWB iii)XCHG iv)MOVSB

Understand

17

2. Summarize the following instructions i.WAIT ii.HLT iii.ESC iv.NOP.

Understand

17

3. Explain briefly about string instructions. Understa

nd 16

4. Discuss assembly language program to find sum of squares. Understa

nd 17

5. Explain a program to read ASCII code after a strobe signal is sent from a Keyboard?

Understand

17

6. Identifythelogicalinstructionsavailablein8086withonexample. Understand

16

PART – C CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS

S. No

Question Blooms

Taxonom

yLevel

Cours

e

Outcom

e UNIT –I

1 Discuss status bit conditions with Diagram? Understand 4

2 Explain conditional branch instructions? Understand 3

3 Compare different instruction formats? Understand 3

4 Define program interrupt? Explain External interrupts and internal interrupts.

Apply 7

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 126

5 Explain i) Indirect addressing Mode ii) Relative addressing Mode iii) Auto increment or auto decrement mode. Iv) Indexed addressing mode and Base register addressing mode.

Understand 7

UNIT – II

1 Define a mapping function? Explain Associative mapping technique with Example?

Understand 9

2 Explain i) Write through policy ii) write back policy iii) Hit and Miss ratio.

Understand 10

3

The Access Time of a Cache Memory is 100 ns and that of main memory 1000 ns. It is estimated that 80 percent of the memory requests are for read and the remaining 20 percent for write. The hit ratio for read access onlyis0.9.AWritethroughProcedureisused. 1. Calculate the average access time of the system considering only memory read cycles. 2. Calculate the average access time of the system for both

Apply 9

4

A computer employs RAM chips of 256x8 and ROM chips of 1024x8 the computer system needs 2K bytes of RAM, 4K bytes of ROM and 4 interface units each with 4 registers .A memory mapped I/O configuration is used .the two highest order bits of the address bus are assigned 00 for RAM,01forROM,and10forinterfaceregister. a) Calculate Howmany RAM and ROM chips are needed? b) Draw a memory address map for the system.

Understand 9

5

Aneight-wayset-associativecacheconsistsofatotalof256blocks.The mainmemorycontains8192blocks,eachconsistingof128words.

1. Calculate number of bits in the main memory address?

Apply 10

UNIT -III

1. In many computers the cache block size is in the range 32 to 128 bytes. Discuss the main advantages and disadvantages of making the size of the cache blocks larger or smaller?

Understand 10

2. Define a mapping unction? Explain Set – Associative mapping technique with Example?

Understand 10

3. Explain virtual memory Address translation with diagram? Understand 11

4.

Calculate then umber of page faults using Least Recently used(LRU) Page Replacement Algorithm for the following CPU References.

7 0 1 2 0 3 0 4 2 3 0 3 2 1 2 0 1 7 0 1

Apply 11

5.

Calculate the number of page faults using First In First out(FIFO)Page Replacement Algorithm for the following CPU References. 3 4 5 6 4 7 4 0 6 7 4 7 6 5 6 4 5 3 4 5

Apply 11

UNIT –IV 1. ExplainwhataretheGPR&SPRregistersin8086? Understan

d 12

2. Classify flag register in 8086 and explain it? Apply 13

3. Differentiate between physical address, effective address and offset Address?

Understand

14

4. Discusstheaddressingmodesprovidedby8086withexamples? Understand

15

5. Explain about interrupts in8086? Understand

12

UNIT -V

1. Define non-Mask able interrupts? Apply 12, 16

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 127

2. Explain ALIGN&ASSUME directives? Understand

16

3. Discuss about cross-compiler. Understand

16 4. Explainabouttheinstructionformatin8086? Understan

d 16

5. Identifythelogicalinstructionsavailablein8086withoneexample. Understand

16 12.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

S.No

Questions

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outco

me

UNIT –I

1 Explain i) Implied mode ii) Immediate Mode iii) Register Mode iv)Register indirect mode v) Direct addressing mode with Examples.

Understand 2

2 Explain different program control instructions in CPU? Understand 3

3 Discuss status bit conditions with Diagram? Understand 3

4 Explain conditional branch instructions? Understand 2 UNIT –II

1 Explain the DMA transfer technique with the block diagram? Understand 7

2 Describe input-output-processor (IOP) Organization in detail? Understand 6

3 Compare I/O versus Memory bus? Understand 6

4 Explain DMA Controller with the block diagram? Understand 7

5 Differentiate isolated I/O and memory mapped I/O? Understand 6

UNIT -III

1 State and Explain virtual memory organization technique? Remember 10

2 Explain virtual memory Address translation? Understand 10

3 Define cache memory? Explain Associative mapping technique?. Remember 11

4 Define a mapping function? Explain Set-Associative mapping technique?

Remember 11

5 Explain i) ROM ii) PROM iii) EPROM iv) EEPROM. Understand 9

UNIT –IV

1 Explain the various addressing modes of 8086 with examples? Understand 15

2 Explain difference between 8086 and8088? Apply 12

3 Explain what are the GPR & SPR registers in8086? Understand 13

4 Classify flag register in 8086 and explain flag instruction set? Apply 13

5 Explain the functional block diagram of 8086and write about the functions of Each block?

Understand 13

UNIT -V

1 Discuss the instructions formats of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

2 Explain Arithmetic instruction set of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

3 Explain data transfer instructions of 8086 with examples? Understand 16

4 Explain short notes on JUMP instructions with examples? Understand 17

5 Explain the following instructions i). WAIT ii). HLT iii). ESC iv).NOP.

Understand 17

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 128

13. DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES (A10562)

13.0. COURSE DESCRIPTION

CourseTitle Discrete Mathematical Structures CourseCode A2CS07 Regulation MLR16

CourseStructure Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

3 1 - 3 Course Coordinator Mrs. B. Raswitha

Team of Instructors -------------------------------------------------------

13.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

Learn the fundamental concepts in mathematics. It can be used by the students in computer science as an introduction to the underlying ideas of mathematics for computer science. It explains topics like mathematical logic, predicates, relations, functions, combinatorics, algebraic structures and graph theory. 13.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Week Prerequisites UG 3 4 Fundamentals of Computer, Basic

Mathematics

13.3 MARK DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks

University

End

Exam Marks

Total Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests. The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion. Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

75 100

13.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1. I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

2. I Assignment --- 5

3. II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

4. II Assignment ---- 5

5. External Examination 3 hours 75

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 129

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

I. Identify and distinguish between the notion of discrete and continuous mathematical structures

II. Analyze the basic concepts of relations and functions III. Learn the concepts groups and group homomorphism IV. Understand to solve problems using counting techniques and combinatory in the

context of discrete probability V. Apply principles of Recurrence Relations to calculate generating functions and solve

theRecurrence relations

13.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

a) Analyze and examine the validity of argument by using propositional and predicate calculus

b) Apply basic counting techniques to solve the combinatorial problems c) Apply sets relations and di graphs to solve applied problems d) Understand the basic concepts of graph theory and some related theoretical problems e) Students will participate in GATE, PGECET and other competitive examinations 13.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

ProgramOutcomes Level Proficiency Assessedby

A Ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, Computing , Science and engineering to solve Computer Science and Engineeringproblems.

S Assignments,

Exams

B Ability to design and conduct engineering experiments,as well as toanalyze

S Assignments,

Tutorials

C

An ability to design and construct a hardware and software system, component,or process to meet desired needs, within realistic constraints.

Assignment, Tutorial, Lectures

D An ability to function on multi-disciplinary teams S

Lectures, Tutorials, Problem solving

E An ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems

H Lectures

F An understanding of professional, social andethical responsibility

N --

G

An ability to communicate effectively. The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context

N Lectures,

Motivation

I A recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning

H

Assignments, Tutorials,

Exams

J Acknowledge of contemporary issues N --

K An ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for Engineering practice.

L Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.

H Tutorials

Assignments

M An ability to use the techniques, skills, and. modern engineering tools necessary for the development of engineering system

H Lectures

N An ability to setup an enterprise. H Lectures

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related 13.7 SYLLABUS:

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 130

OBJECTIVES:

To develop problem-solving techniques and explore topics in a variety of areas of discrete mathematics, including but not limited to logic, graph theory, set theory, recursions, combinatorics, and algorithms. Students will learn to express statements in the language of formal logic and draw conclusions, model situations in terms of graph and set theory, find and interpret recursive definitions for mathematical sequences, use combinatorial methods to approach counting problems. OUTCOMES:

• Ability to Illustrate by examples the basic terminology of functions, relations, and sets and demonstrate knowledge of their associated operations.

• Ability to Demonstrate in practical applications the use of basic counting principles of permutations, combinations, inclusion/exclusion principle and the pigeonhole methodology.

• Ability to represent and Apply Graph theory in solving computer science problems UNIT – I

Mathematical Logic: Statements and notations, Connectives, Well formed formulas, Truth Tables,Tautology, Equivalence implication, Normal forms, Quantifiers, Universal quantifiers. Predicates: Predicative logic, Free & Bound variables, Rules of inference, Consistency, Proof of contradiction, Automatic Theorem Proving. UNIT - II

Relations: Properties of Binary Relations, Equivalence Relation, Transitive closure, Compatibility andPartial ordering relations, Lattices, Hasse diagram. Functions: inverse Function , Composition of functions, Recursive Functions. UNIT - III

Elementary Combinatorics: Basis of counting, Combinations & Permutations, With repetitions,Constrained repetitions, Binomial Coefficients, Binomial Multinomial theorems, The principles of Inclusion – Exclusion, Pigeon- hole principles and its applications. UNIT - IV

Recurrence Relation: Generating Functions, Function of Sequences, Calculating Coefficient ofgenerating function, Recurrence relations, Solving recurrence relation by substitution and Generating functions , Characteristics roots solution, In homogeneous Recurrence Relation. UNIT - V

Introduction to Trees, Spanning rees,DFS,BFS,MinimalSpanning,Trees,Prims,Kruskal‘s Algorithm, Representation of Graphs, Planar Graphs, Graph theory and applications. Isomorphism and sub graphs, Multi graph and Euler circuits, Hamiltonian Graphs, Chromatic number. TEXT BOOKS:

1. Discrete Mathematics for Computer Scientists and Mathematicians, second edition,

J.L.Mott, A. Kandel, T.P. Baker, PHI

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Logic and Discrete Mathematics, Grass Man and Tremblay, Pearson Education.

2. Elements of Discrete Mathematics- A Computer Oriented Approach, C.L.Liu, D.P. Mohapatra, 3rd edition, TMH.

3. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics- An Applied Introduction-5th Edition– Ralph. P.Grimaldi, Pearson Education.

13.8 COURSE PLANNER

Lectur

e No. Course Learning

Outcomes Bloomsleve

l

Topics to becovered

Reference

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 131

L0

Discuss and apply the basic methods of discrete(non continuous) mathematics in Computer Science

Remember Statements andnotations T1:1.1-1.5

L1 Explain and understand the use of various types of connectives

Apply Connectives http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106094/1

T1:1.9-1.10

L2 Discuss about Well-formed formulas and Tautologies

Remember Well formed formulas http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106094/1

T1:1.4,1.6-1.8,

2.1-2.3

L3 Describe Statement Formulas and construct TruthTables

Remember Truth Tables http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106094/1

T1:2.5,2.6

L4 Describe Statement Formulas and construct TruthTables

Remember Tautology http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectI

T1:2.8

L5-

L6 Understand the Equivalence of Formulas

Understand Equivalence implication Normal forms http://nptel.ac.in/courses 106106094/8

T1:3.1

L7 Apply equivalent formulas and reduce into Disjunctive Normal Forms(DNF)

Apply CNF,DNFhttp://nptel.ac.in/video. php? Subject I d=106106094/8

T1:5.1-5.2

L8

Apply equivalent formulas and reduce into Principle Disjunctive Normal Forms(PDNF)

Apply PCNF http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectI d=106106094/8

T1:5.3

L9 Apply equivalent formulas and Principle Conjunctive Normal Forms(PCNF)

Apply PDNF http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectI d=106106094/8

T1:5.4

L10-

L11 Explain and understand the use of quantifiers

Apply Quantifiers, universal quantifiers http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/3

T1:5.4

L12 Understand the importance and usage of predicates

Apply Predicates: Predicative logic, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/3

T1:6.1-6.2

L13 Define free and bound variables

Free & Bound variables, T1:6.3-6.4

L14 Discover the methods of proving theorems by Rules of Inference

Understand Rules of inference, http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectI d=106106094/5

T1:6.5-6.7

L15-l6 Apply the knowledge of Consistency of Premises and Indirect Method of Proof

Apply Consistency ,proof of contradiction http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/7

T1:8.1-8.3

L17 Solve the problems by using Automatic Theorem Proving

Apply Automatic TheoremProving

T1:9.1-9.2

L18 Understand and analyze the Properties of Binary Relations in a Set

Understand

Relations :Properties of Binary Relations, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/13

T1:9.5-9.6

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 132

L19-

L20

Apply the knowledge of Equivalence Relations in problem solving

Apply

Equivalence and, transitiveclosure, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/23

T1:10.1-10.3

L21 Apply the knowledge of compatibility

Apply Compatibility and partial orderingrelations, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1061

T1:11.1-11.2

L22 Apply the knowledge of Lattices

Apply Lattices, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094 /40

T1:11.3-11.4

L23 Apply the knowledge of Hasse diagram

Apply Hasse diagram

T1:11.5-11.6

L24-

L25 Apply the knowledge of Functions

Apply

Functions:Inverse Function Composition of functions, recursive Functions, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094

T1:12.1

L26 Describe Lattices Understand Lattice and its Properties, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/28

T1:12.4

L27-

L29

Describe and analyze the computational processes using Algebraic Structures

Understand

Algebraic Structures:

Algebraic systems, Examples and general properties, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/28

T1:12.5-12.6

L30 Explain and analyze the conceptsof Semi groups and Monoids in algebraic structures

Apply Semi groups and monads,

T1:7.5

L31-

L32 Analyze the computational processes using Groups

Analyze Groups sub groups’ homomorphism Isomorphism.

T1:7.6-7.7

L33 Analyze the computational processes using analytic and combinatorial methods

Analyze Elementary Combinatorics:

Basis of counting,

T1:14.4-14.7

L34 Explain the concepts of elementary combinatorics.

Apply

Combinations & Permutations, with repetitions, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094

T1:14.8-14.9

L35 Explain the Principle ofInclusion-Exclusion

Apply Combinations&Permutations, Withrepetitions

T2:15-15.9

L36 Explain the concepts of elementary combinatorics.

Apply Constrainedrepetitions, T2:16.

L37

Discuss the use of BinomialCoefficient

Understand BinomialCoefficients, T2:16.8

L38 Apply the principles of The Binomial and Multinomial Theorems

Apply Binomial Multinomialtheorems,

T1:17-17.2

L39-

L41 Explain the Principle of Inclusion- Exclusion

Apply The principles of Inclusion– Exclusion. Pigeon hole principles http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1061

T1:17.3-17.5

L42 Applications Applications T1:17.6-17.9

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 133

L43 l

Analyze and formulate to Solve Recurrence Relations by Substitution and Generating Functions

Analyse

Recurrence Relation:

Generating Functions http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1061

T1:18-18.3

L44 Understand the methods of Characteristic Roots

Understand Function of SequencesCalculating

T1:18.3-18.5

L45-L46 Understand the methods of Characteristic Roots

Understand Coefficient of generating function, Recurrence relations

T2:18.6-18.9

L47-L48

Analyze and apply the methods to Solve substitution and Generating funds.

Analyze Solving recurrence relation by substitution and Generating functions

T2:19-19.5

L50-L52 Analyze and apply the methods to Solve Inhomogeneous Recurrence Relations

Analyze Characteristics roots solution of Inhomogeneous Recurrence Relation

T2:19.6-19.9

L53 Understand the methods of graphs

Understand

Graph Theory:

Representation of Graph http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/14

T1:20-20.5

L54 Understand the methods of DFS

Understand DFS, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/16

T2:20.6-20.9

L55 Understand the methods of BFS,

Understand

BFS, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/16

T2:21.1-21.6

L56-L58 Understand the methods of planar Graphs.

Understand

SpanningTrees,planarGraphs. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/17

T2:22-22.6

L59-L60 Understand the methods of Graph Theory and Applications

Understand

graphs T2:23-23.6

L61-L62 Understand the methods of Isomorphism and Subgraphs

Understand

Basic Concepts Isomorphism and Subgraphs http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/15

T2:24-24.7

L63 Understand the methods of Multigraphs and Euler circuits,

Understand

Multigraphs and Eulercircuits, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/15

T2:25-25.8

L64 Understand the methods of Hamiltonian graphs,

Understand

Hamiltonian graphs, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106094/15

T2:26-26.7

L65 Understand the methods of Chromatic Numbers

Understand

ChromaticNumbers. T2:27-27.7

13.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

CourseObjective ProgramOutcomes

A B C D E F G H I J k L M N I S S

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 134

II S H III S IV H S

V H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related 13.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

CourseOutcomes

ProgramOutcomes A B C D E F G H I J k L M N

1 S S 2 H 3 S S S 4 H 5 S S

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 135

13.11 OBJECTIVE BITS:

UNIT–I

1. P<->Q=(P->Q)∩ (Q->P) A.Equivalent B. Different C. unequal

D. can not determined Ans:A

2. A product of variables and their negations is called A.Elementary sum B.Elementary product C. Sum

D. Product Ans:B

3. A sum of variables and their negations is called A.Elementary sum B.Elementary product C. Sum

D. Product Ans:A

4. A sum of elementary product variables and their negations is called A.DNF B.CNF

C. PDNF D. PCNF Ans:A

5. A product of elementary sum variables and their negations is called A.DNF B.CNF

C. PDNF D. PCNF Ans:B

6. !(!P)= A.!P B.P

C. 1 D. Q Ans:B

7 Which of the following statement is the negation of the statement, “2 is even and –3 is negative”? A. 2 is even and –3 is not negative. B. 2 is odd and –3 is not negative. C. 2 is even or –3 is not negative. D. 2 is odd or –3 is not negative. Ans: D

8. The equivalent value of the statement formula = (P V (~ P^ Q)) is [ ] A. ~ P ^ ~ Q B. ~P V ~Q C. ~P->~Q D. P V Q Ans :A

9. A proposition that is neither a tautology nor a contradiction is called [ ] A. Converse B. Inference

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 136

C. Contingency D. Negation Ans :C

10. The inverse of P -> Q [ ] A. P->Q B. ~ P ->~ Q C. ~P=>~Q D. P->~Q Ans :B

11. S1: P V~ (P ^Q) and S2: (P ^ Q) ^ ~ (P ^ Q).Which of the following statement is correct? A. S1 is true and S2 is false B. both are true C. S1 is false and s2 is true D. both are false Ans: A

12. If there are 'n' distinct components in a statement formula, then the possible number of combinations of truth value in the truth table is [ ] A. 3n B. 2n C. 4n D. None Ans: B

13. PVf ≡ A. p B. ~p C. f D. T

Ans: B

14. (PQ) ^(QP) = A. PQ B. ~PQ C. P↔Q D. ~P ↔ Q Ans: C

15. The conjunctive normal form of ofPV(PQ) is A. Q ^(~PVQ) B. P^(~PVQ) C. (~PVQ) D. (PQ) Ans: B

16. The statement form (p ⇔ r) ⇒ (q ⇔ r) is equivalent to A. [(∼p r) (p ∼r)] ∼[(∼q r) (q ∼r)] B. ∼[(∼p r) (p ∼r)] [(∼q r) (q ∼r)] C. [(∼p r) (p ∼r)] [(∼q r) (q ∼r)] D. [(∼p r) (p ∼r)] [(∼q r) (q ∼r)] E. ∼[(∼p r) (p ∼r)] [(∼q r) (q ∼r)] Ans: E

17. The function ((p (r q)) ∼(∼q ∼r) is equal to the function A. q r B. ((p r) q)) (p r) C) (p q) (p r) C. (p q) ∼(p r) D. (p r) (p q) Ans : A

18. The truth table for (p q) (p r) is the same as the truth table for

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 137

A. (p q) (p r) B. (p q) r C. (p q) (p r) D. p q E. (p q) p Ans : D

19. The Boolean function [∼(∼p q) ∼(∼p ∼q)] (p r) is equal to the Boolean function A. q B. p r C. p q D. r E. p Ans : E

20. Which of the following functions is the constant 1 function? A. ∼p (p q) B. (p q) (∼p (p ∼q)) C. (p ∼q) (∼p q) D. ((∼p q) (q r)) ∼q E. (∼p q) (p q) Ans: B

UNIT- II

1. Which of the relations are functions A. (1,2),(2,3),(3,1) B. (1,2),(2,2),(3,2) C. (1,2),(2,3),(1,1) D. (1,2),(2,2),(3,2),(4,1),(5,3) Ans:C

2. Which of the following is false? [ ] A. An abelian group can have a non abelian subgroup B. An abelian group can’t have a subgroup C. An abelian group can have abelian sub group D. none Ans:A

3. A one-to- one function is also known as [ ] A. Injective function B. Surjective function C. Bijective function D. None Ans: A

4. The relation (1,2), (1,3), (3,1), (1,1), (3,3), (3,2), (1,4), (4,2), (3,4) is A. Reflexive B. Transitive. C. Symmetric D. Asymmetric Ans : B

5. A partial ordered relation is transitive, reflexive and A. Antisymmetric B. Bisymmetric C. Anti-Reflexive D. Asymmetric Ans: A

6. Let S= 1. Which of the following is not a subset of P(S) (the power set of S) A. ᴓ B. 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 138

C. 1 D. ᴓ, 1 Ans: B

7. The relation ‘divides’ on set of +ve integers is A. Symmetric B. Transitive C. Asymmetric D. Reflexive

Ans:D

8. Let A=1,2,3,4 and the relation R is R=(1,2),(1,3),(4,2) then R is A. Not antisymmetric B. Not irreflexive C. Transitive D. Symmetric Ans:C

9. If A and B are any two sets then A-(A-B) is equal to A. B B. A∩B C. AƯB D. A Ans:B

10. Let P(S) denotes the power set of S. Which of the following is always true A. P(P(S))=P(S) B. P(S)∩P(P(S))=ᶲ C. P(S)∩S=P(S) D. S € P(S) Ans:B

11. If A,B,C,D are any four sets then (A∩B)X(C∩D) isequal to A. (AXB)Ư(CXD)

B. (AXC)∩(BXD) C. (AƯB)X(CƯD) D. (AXD)∩(BXC) Ans:B

12. If a relation R on a set A is transitive and irreflexive then it is A. Anti-Symmetric B. Symmetric C. Asymmetric D. None

Ans:C

13. The relation ‘is congruent modulo to’ on the set of integers 0,1,2,……10is A. Partial ordering relation B. Equivalence relation C. Symmetric relation D. None

Ans:B

14. A lattice which has both elements 0and 1 is called a A. Complete lattice B. Modular Lattice C. Boolean Lattice D. Bounded Lattice Ans:D

15. A relation R on a set S is said to be Partial ordering if it is A. Reflexive, Antisymmetric, transitive B. Reflexive, Asymmetric, transitive

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 139

C. Reflexive, symmetric, transitive D. None of these Ans; A

16. (AUB)C=

A. AC UBC B. AC ∩BC C. (A ∩B)C

D. None of these Ans; B

17. (A ∩B)C= A. AC UBC

B. AC ∩BC C. (AUB)C

D. None of these Ans; A

18. Let A=1,2,3,4 and the relation R is R=(1,2),(1,3),(4,2)then R is A. Not antisymmetric B. Transitive C. Asymmetric D. Not irreflexive Ans; B

19. Let A and B be sets with cardinalities m and n respectively.The number of one-one mappings from A to B when m<n is

A. mPn

B. nPm C. mCn

D. nCm

Ans; B

20. The number of elements in the power set P(S) of the set S= φ, 1,2,3 is A. 2

B. 4 C. 8

D. 6

Ans; C

UNIT- III

1. How many different 8-bit strings is there that begin and end with one? A. 58 B. 60 C. 62 D. 64

2. In how many ways can be draw a king or a queen from ordinary deck of playing cards? A. 4 B. 6 C. 8 D. 10

3. How many ways can we get a sum of 7 when two distinguishable dice are rolled? A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7

4. How many ways can we draw a club or a diamond from a pack of cards? A. 24 B. 26 C. 30

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 140

D. 32 5. In how many ways can be drawn an ace or a king from an arbitrary deck of playing

cards? A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7

6. How many possible outcomes are there when we roll a pair of dice, one red and one green? A. 36 B. 38 C. 40 D. 42

7. In how many different ways one can answer all the questions of a true- false test consisting of 4 questions? A. 14 B. 16 C. 18 D. 20

8. How many ways 16-bit strings are there containing exactly five 0's? A. 4367 B. 4366 C. 4369 D. 4368

9. from 10 programmers in how many ways can 5 be selected when a particular programmer included every time? A. 126 B. 128 C. 122 D. 124

10. Determine the value of n if nC4=nC3. A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7

11. Determine the value of n if nCn-2=10. A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7

12. The number of combinations of n things taken all at a time is A. 0 B. 1! C. 2! D. 3!

13. (n+1)!/n! is A. n! B. n C. n+1 D. (n+1)!

14. How many words of 3 distinct letters can formed from the letters of the word LAND? A. 20 B. 24 C. 28

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 141

D. 32 15. There are 4 black, 3 green, and 5red balls. In how many ways can they be arranged in a

row? A. 27720 B. 27770 C. 27790 D. 27710

16. In how many ways can one choose two cards in succession from a deck of 52 cards, such that the first chosen card is not replaced? A. 52 X 50 B. 52 X 52 C. ()% X 50 D. 52 X 51

17. In how many ways can a party of persons arrange themselves around a circular table? A. 6! B. 8! C. 8! D. 9!

18. In how many different ways can the letters of the word ‘MATHEMATICS’ be arranged in such a way that the vowels always come together? A.10080 B. 4989600 C. 120960 D. 2880 Ans:C 19. 2P(n,n-2)= A. P(n,n) B. P(2n,n) C. P(n,1) D. P(n,2n) Ans: A 20. C(2n,n+1)+2C(2n,n)+C(2n,n-1)= A.C(n+2,n+1) B. C(2n+2,n) C. C(2n+2,n+1) D. C(n-1,n-2) UNIT-IV

1. Find a generating function for ar=the number of non-negative integral solutions to e1+e2+&.+en=r where 0<=ei. A. (1+X+X2+----+XK+----.)n B. (1+X-X2+----+XK+----)n C. (1-X-X2+----.+XK+----.)n D. (1-X+X2+----+XK+----.)n

2. The coefficient of X9 in (+X3+X8)10 is A. C(9,3) B. C(10,4) C. C(10,3) D. C(11,4)

3. Recurrence relation is also called as a. Difference equation A. reverse equation B. forward equation C. backward equation

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 142

4. The recurrence relation an=an-1+5, with a1=2, the sequence is A. 6, 11,16----- B. 7,12,17---- C. 8,13,18---- D. 9,14,19-----

5. The recurrence relation an=an-1+an-2, with a1=a2=1, the sequence is A. 1,2,3,5,8 B. 2,3,5,8,13 C. 1,1,2,3,5,8,13 D. 2,5,8,13

6. The recurrence relation an=an-1+5, with a=6, the sequence is A. 6, 11,16---- B. 7,12,17---- C. 8,13,18---- D. 9,14,19----

7. Find a generating function for ar=the number of non-negative integral solutions to e1+e2+&.+en=r where 0<=ei<=1. A. (1-X)n B. (1+X)n C. Xn D. (X-1)n

8. Find the coefficient of X10 in 1/(1-X)5. A. C(14,10) B. C(10,10) C. C(11,11) D. C(13,11)

9. Find the coefficient of X10 in (1+X+X2+X3+&.)2 A. 10 B. 11 C. 12 D. 13

10. Find the coefficient of X10 in A. 1/(1-X3. B. (10)(11)/2 b)(12)(10)/2 C. (12)(11)/2 D. (10)(10)/2

11. Find a generating function for ar=the number of ways of distributing similar balls into n numbered bones where each box is non-empty. A. (X2+X3+----)n B. (X+X2+X3+----)n C. (1+X3+X4+---)n D. (X+X5+X6+----)n

12. Find a generating function for ar=the number of ways the sum r can be obtained when 2 distinguishable dice are tossed and the first shows an even number and second shows an odd number. A. (X2+X4+X6)(X+X3+ X5) B. (X2+X4)(X+X3- X5) C. (X2+X4-X6)(X+ X5) D. (X2+X6)(X+X3+ X5)

13. Generating function of 1 is A. 1/(1+X) B. 1/(1-X) C. 1/(1-2X) D. 1/(1-3X)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 143

14. Generating function of an is A. /(1-X) B. 1/(1+X) C. 1/(1-aX) D. 1/(1+aX)

15. Generating function of C(k,n ) is A. (1+X)k B. (1+3X)k C. (1+2X)k D. (1-X)k

16. find the particular solution of the difference equation ar+2- 2ar+1+ar=3r+5. A. (1/3)r3+r2 B. (1/2)r3+r2 C. (1/4)r3+r2 D. (1/5)r3+r2

17. Solve the recurrence relation ar-ar-1-6ar-2=-30, a0=20, a1=-5. A. ar=11.2r+3.5r B. ar=(2+r)4r-1 C. ar=1.2r+4.3r+5 D. ar=11.(-2)r+4.3r+5

18. Find the particular solution of the difference equation ar-1- 5ar+1+6ar=5r. A. (1/6)5r B. (1/5)5r C. (1/6)6r D. (1/6)4r

19. Find the particular solution of the difference equation ar-1- 5ar+1+6ar=5r A. (1/6)5r B. (1/5)5r C. (1/6)6r D. (1/6)4r

20. Generating function of (n+3)(n+2)(n) is A. 6/(1-X)2 B. 6X/(1-X)4 C. 6/(1-X)4 D. 6/(1-3X)3

UNIT- V

1. A regular graph of degree has no lines. A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 3

2. Suppose G is a non-directed graph with 12 edges. If G has 6 vertices each of degree 3 and the rest have degree less than 3, what is the minimum number of vertices G can have? A. 6 B. 9 C. 12 D. 15

3. The maximum degree of any vertex in a simple graph with n vertices is A. n B. n+1 C. n-1 D. n+2

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 144

4. What is the largest number of vertices in a graph with 35 edges if all vertices are degree at least 3. A. 9 B. 11 C. 8 D. 10

5. A graph G has 21 edges, 3 vertices of degree 4 and other vertices of degree 3. Find the number of vertices in G. A. 10 B. 1 C. 12 D. 13

6. The maximum number of edges in a simple graph with n vertices is A. n(n-1)/2 B. (n-1)/2 C. n(n+1)/2 D. n(n-1)

7. A graph which allows more than one edge to join a pair of vertices is called A. Simple graph B. Multigraph C. null graph D. weighted graph

8. A graph G with no self loops is called a A. Simple graph B. Multigraph C. null graph D. weighted graph

9. A graph having loops but no multiple edges called a A. Simple graph B. Multigraph C. pseudo graph D. weighted graph

10. A simple graph G, in which every pair of distinct vertices are adjacent is called A. Simple graph B. Multigraph C. null graph D. complete graph

11. Which data structure is used to implement DFS? A. Stack B. queue C. list D. heap

12. A binary tree T has n leaves. The number of nodes of degree 2 in T is A. n-1 B. n C. n+1 D. 2n

13. The process of accessing data stored in a tape is similar to manipulating data on a A. stack B. list C. queue D. heap

14. Find the order of vertices of G are processed using a DFS algorithm beginning at vertex A.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 145

A. ABEFDGCH B. ABFEDGHC C. ABEFGDHC D. ABEFDGHC

15. Find the order of vertices of G are processed using a DFS algorithm beginning at vertex A. A. ABEFDGCH B. ABFEDGHC C. ABEFCGHD D. ABEFDGHC

16. DFS stands for A. Depth First Search B. Deep First Search C. Dangling First Search D. Dig First Search

17. Which data structure is used to implement DFS? A. Stack B. queue C. list D. heap

18. Pre-order is nothing but A. Depth First Order B. Breadth First order C. Topological order D. Linear order

19. The vertices visit order in DFS is (starting point is at 1) A. 12485367 B. 12485637 C. 12845637 D. 12458637

20. Which is used to find the connected component of graph? A. BFS B. DFS C. Simple Graph D. Tree A. Eular

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 146

13.12 ASIGNMENT QUESTION BANK

S. No Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Cours

e

Outco

me UNIT–I

1.

a) Prove the following logical equivalence without using truth table(p->q) ∩ [!q∩ (r Ư!q)]!(qƯp)

b) Construct the truth table [(p->q)ʌ(q->r)]->(p->r)

Apply

2.

a) Show that the scope of the quantifiers (x)[(P(x)↔Q(x)ʌ (Ǝx)/R(X)]ʌS(x) b) Obtain the principles disjunction normal form of [( pʌ q)ᴠ(˥p ʌ r)ᴠ(qʌ r)]

Apply

3. a) [(pƯq) ∩ (p->r) ∩ (q->r)]->r find out the tautology b) (!p->r) ∩ (qp) construct the disjunctive normal forms

Evaluate

UNIT–II

1.

a) If A,B are twos sets,then AƯB=(A-B)ƯB

b)The directed graph of the relation R=(1,1),(1,3),(2,1),(2,3),(2,4),(3,1),(3,2),(4,1) on the set1,2,3,4is

Apply

2. Design the Hasse diagram for X=2,3,6,24,36,48 and relation be such that xy, if x dividesy (Level6)

Analyze

3

Verify the following relation R on X=1,2,3,4, is equivalence relation or not? Explain R = (1,1),(1,4),(4,1),(2,2),(2,3),(3,4),(3,3),(3,2 ),(4,3),(4,4) (Level4)

Evaluate

4. Apply the Hasse diagramfor the divisibility Relation on the set A in the following A=1,2,3,4,6, 8,9,12,18,24. (Level6)

Apply

UNIT-III

1. In how many different ways can a committee of 5 teachers and 4 students be selected from 9 teachers and 15 students?( Level5)

2.

a) In how many different orders can 3 men and 3 women be seated in a row of 6 seats if anyone may sit in any of the seats the first and last seats must be filled by men and women are seated alternatively all members of the same sex seated in adjacent seats.

b) How many 6 digit numbers are there with exactly one 5?( Level5)

3. Determine the coefficient of X5 in (a+bx+cx2)10. (Level5)

4. Use Binomial identities to evaluate 1.2.3=2.3.4+………+(n-2)(n-1)n..(Level5)

UNIT-IV

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 147

1.

a) Solve the recurrence relation S(n)+10s(n-1)+9s(n-2)=0 where s(0)=3,s(1)=1. b) Find the coefficient of x8 in 1/(x-3)(x-2)2.

Analyze

2. Solve the recurrence relation an-7an-1+10an-2=0 for n≥2. (Level3)

Apply

3. Find the coefficient of x20 in (x3+x4+x5+…..)5.

Apply

UNIT-V

1. If G=(V.E) is a loop –free undirected graph with |v|= n≥3 and |E|>(n-1)c2+2 then prove that G has a Hamiltonian cycle.(Level4)

Analyze

2. . Derive an algoritham for constructing Euler circuits in directed Graphs Level5)

Analyze

3. Apply Kruskal’s and Prim’s algorithm to determine a minimal spanning tree for the weighted graph shown below:(Level3)

Apply

13.13. TUTORIAL QUESTION BANK

S. No Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcom

e

UNIT–I

1.

A=1,2,---5 and define r on A by xryiff x+1=y then define r2=rr, r3=r2r etc. Find (i) r(ii)r2(iii)r3.

Apply

2.

Construct the truth tables (i) [(p->q)ʌ(q->r)]->(p->r) (ii) (!P<->!Q)<->(Q<->R)

Apply

3. Show that the canonical product of sum of the formula (p->(q∩r)) ∩ (!p->(!q∩!r)) is π(1,2,3,4,5,6).

Evaluate

4. Show that the scope of the quantifiers (x)[(P(x)↔Q(x)ʌ (Ǝx)/R(X)]ʌS(x)

Evaluate

5. Obtain the principles conjunction normal form for Followingi)(˥p->r) ʌ(qp) ii)[( p ᴠ q)ʌ(p->r)ʌ(q->r)->r](Level4)

Evaluate

UNIT–II

1.

Simplify the following: (i) A∩(B-A) (ii)(A∩B)U(A∩B)U (A∩B∩C∩D).

Apply

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 148

2.

If N is the set of positive integers and R is the set of real numbers, examine which of the following sets is empty: (i)x/x€N,2x+7=3 (ii)x/x€R,x2+4=6 (iii)x/x€R,x2+3x+3=0(Level6)

Apply

3. Using Venn diagrams, investigate the truth or falsity of (i)A∆(B∩C)=(A∆B)∩(A∆C)

B)∩ (A

Analyze

4.

a) Verify the following relation R on X=1,2,3,4, is equivalence relation or not? b) Explain R = (1,1),(1,4),(4,1),(2,2),(2,3),(3,4),(3,3),(3,2),(4,3),(4,

Evaluate

5. Apply the Hasse diagram for the divisibility Relation on the set A in the following A = 1,2,3,4,6, 8,9,12,18,24.(Level6)

Apply

UNIT-III

1. In how many different ways can a committee of 5 teachers and 4 students be selected from 9 teachers and 15 students? ( Level5)

2.

a)In how many different orders can 3 men and 3 women be seated in a row of 6 seats if any one may sit in any of the seats the first and last seats must be filled by men and women are seated alternatively all members of the same sex seated in adjacent seats. b)How many 6 digit numbers are there with exactly one 5?( Level5)

3.

Discover the number of permutations of the letters of the word MASSASAUGA. In how many of these, all four A’s are together? How many of them begin with S?(Level3)

4. Enumerating r-permutations without repetitions P(n,r)=n(n-1)(n-2)-----(n-r+1)=n!/(n-r)! (Level5)

5. Find the sum of coefficient of odd powers of x in (1+x+x2+x3)7

UNIT-IV

1. Solve D(k)-8D(k-1)+16d(k-2)=0 where D(2)=16 and D(3)=80. (Level4)

Analyze

2. Solve the recurrence relation T(k)-7T(k-1)+10T(k-2)=k2+1 and T(0)=4,T(1)=17. (Level3)

Apply

3.

In how many ways can we distribute 24 pencils to 4 children so that each child gets atleast 4 pencils but no more than nine? (Level3)

Apply

4.

Use generating function to determine how many four elements subsets S=1,2,3,----15 contain no constructive integers.

Apply

UNIT-V

1. Let G=(V,E) be a sample graph of order n and size m.If m>(n/2)2, prove that G cannot be a bipartite graph.

Analyze

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 149

2. Determine that the bipartite graphs are Planar graphs.(Level5)

Evaluate

3. Prove the every connected graph having a traigle as a subgraph is at least 3-chromotic number (Level5)

Evaluate

4. Show that a planner graph with 8 vertices and 13 edges is not 2-colorable

Analyze

5. Prove that every cubic graph is 4-colorable. (Level3)

Apply

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 150

14. JAVA PROGRAMMING (A2CS13)

14.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Title JAVA PROGRAMMING

Course Code A2CS13

Regulation MLR-16

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits

3 1 - 3

Course Coordinator Dr. K.SRINIVAS RAO, Professor (IT)

Team of Instructors Dr. K.SRINIVAS RAO, Professor (IT)

14.1 COURSE OVERVIEW: This course explains the fundamental ideas behind the object oriented approach to

programming. Knowledge of java helps to create the latest innovations in programming. Like

the successful computer languages that came before, java is the blend of the best elements of

its rich heritage combined with the innovative concepts required by its unique environment.

This course involves OOP concepts, java basics, inheritance, polymorphism, interfaces, inner

classes, packages, Exception handling, multithreading, collection framework, files, JDBC and

GUI components. This course is presented to students by power point projections, course

handouts, lecture notes, course handouts, assignments, objective and subjective tests.

14.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 3 6 Minimum awareness of C

language

14.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

a) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

Session Marks (25M)

University

End

Exam

Marks

Total

Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests. The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 Questions, each carrying 5 marks. 75 100 The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half-units of syllabus and second midterm

75 100

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 151

examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

b) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)

a

Describe Object Oriented Programming principles. Analyze the need for OOP over POP.

Exams, In-Class Application Activities,

Class Discussions.

b Design and develop Java Program to solve real world problems

Exams, Research Paper

c Compare Multi Tasking with Multi Threading.

Exams

d

Demonstrate their knowledge of how to handle exceptions and build stand alone and Applet applications.

Exams, In-Class

Application Activities, Class Discussions.

e

Demonstrate Java to Database Connectivity with four drivers and design JDBC application to interact with the database.

Exams, Class Discussions

f Demonstrate AWT controls and GUI application.

Exams, Class Discussions 14.4. EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks 1 I mid 80 M 20 2 I assignment - 05 3 II mid 80 M 20 4 II assignment - 05 5 External examination 3 Hours 75

Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level

I. To impart basic concepts of

OOP concepts. To explain key

skills basics of Java

programming.

a. Students will be able to Identify

various the necessity for OOP

paradigm over structured

programming and become familiar

with the fundamental concepts in

OOP

Apply [Level 3]

II. To familiarize the problems

and write programs using object

oriented programming approach.

b. Students will be able to design

and develop java programs,

analyze, and interpret object

oriented data and report results

Evaluate [Level 5]

III. To facilitate students to solve

real world problems using

packages and interfaces concepts

c. Students will be able to compare

and develop java programs on

Understand [Level 2]

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 152

packages & interfaces

IV. To facilitate students in

understanding various concept of

Multi threading and Multi

Tasking.

d. Students will be able to compare

and contrast between

Multithreading with Multi tasking

Evaluate [Level 5]

V. To impart the key skill of GUI

applications using AWT

controls& event handling

e. Students will be able to

demonstrate an ability to visualize

and work on laboratory and

multidisciplinary tasks like console

and windows applications both for

standalone and Applets programs

Apply [Level 3]

VI. To impart the key skill of GUI

applications using Swing controls

f. Students will be able to critique

the performance variation of Swing

controls

Create [Level 6]

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create 14.5 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

Blooms Level

A

An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, Computing, Science and engineering to solve Computer Science and Engineering problems. (Fundamental engineering analysis skills).

H Solving Gate and

Text book Problems

Apply

B An ability to design and conduct engineering experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data. (Information retrieval skills).

S Solving Gate and

Text book Problems

Apply

C An ability to design and construct a hardware and software system, component, or process to meet desired needs, within realistic constraints. (Creative skills).

H Assignment and Gate questions

Apply and Analyze

D

Graduates will demonstrate an ability to visualize and work on laboratory and Multi-disciplinary tasks individually or as a member within the teams. (team

work)

S Mini and Micro

Projects

Apply

E

An ability to demonstrate skills to use the techniques, modern engineering Tools, Software and equipments necessary to analyze computer engineering Problems.(Engg. Problem solving Skills)

S Micro Project Models/ Gate

questions

Apply

F An understanding of professional, social and ethical responsibility

N -------

--------

G

An ability to recognize the global issues like green initiatives and alternate energy sources and to take technology to villages and to recognize the rural requirements. (Engg. Application Skills)

S Micro Projects models / Gate

questions

Analyze and Justify

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 153

H The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context.

H Assignment and Gate questions

Analyze

I

Graduate will develop confidence for self education and acquire new knowledge in the computing discipline and ability and practice for Multidisciplinary tasks as a member within the teams

S Class Test &

Seminars

Analyze

J To communicate effectively S Seminars

Understand & Analyze

K An ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for Engineering practice.

S Class Tests & Group Activity in class room

Apply

L

Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.(Continuing Education )

H GATE

Apply

M

The use of current application software and the design and use of operating systems and the analysis, design, testing and documentation of computer programs for the use in Computer Science and engineering technologies.

S Text Book

Problems as part of Assignment

Apply

N An ability to setup an enterprise.(Employment Skills) S Placement

Design and Develop

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

14.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical foundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science and engineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-based systems to real-world problems (fundamental engineering analysis Skills).

S Assignment,

Exams, Lectures

b An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data (Information retrieval skills).

S Lectures

Assignments , Tutorials

c An ability to design and construct a hardware and software system, component, or process to meet desired needs, within realistic constraints.

H Assignments,

tutorials, lectures

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams (Teamwork).

N -

e

An ability to analyze a problem, and identify, formulate and use the appropriate computing and engineering requirements for obtaining its solution (Engineering problem solving

skills).

H Lectures Tutorials

f An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and social issues and responsibilities (Professional

integrity). S

Lectures Assignments

g An ability to communicate effectively, both in writing and orally (speaking / writing skills).

N -

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 154

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals, organizations, and society (Engineering

impact assessment skills).

S Examination

i Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in continuing professional development and life-long learning (Continuing education awareness).

N -

j A knowledge of contemporary issues (Social awareness). N -

k An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary for computing and engineering practice(Practical

engineering analysis Skills) H

Lectures, Assignments

Tutorials, Exam

l Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.

S Tutorials

m

The use of current application software; the design and use of operating Systems; and the analysis, design, testing, and documentation of computer programs for the use in information engineering technologies.

H Lectures,

Assignments

n The basic knowledge of electronics, electrical components, computer architecture and applications of micro computer systems, communications needed in data transport.

H Lectures,

Assignments

N= None S= Supportive H = Highly Related

14.7 SYLLABUS: UNIT - I JAVA BASICS: Review of Object oriented concepts, History of Java, Java buzzwords, JVM architecture, Data types, Variables, Scope and life time of variables, arrays, operators, control statements, type conversion and casting, simple java program, constructors, methods, Static block, Static Data, Static Method String and String Buffer Classes, Using Java API Document. UNIT - II INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM: Basic concepts, Types of inheritance, Member access rules, Usage of this and Super key word, Method Overloading, Method overriding, Abstract classes, Dynamic method dispatch, Usage of final keyword. PACKAGES AND

INTERFACES: Defining package, Access protection, importing packages, Defining and Implementing interfaces, and Extending interfaces. I / O STREAMS: Concepts of streams, Stream classes- Byte and Character stream, Reading console Input and Writing Console output, File Handling. UNIT - III EXCEPTION HANDLING: Exception types, Usage of Try, Catch, Throw, Throws and Finally keywords, Built-in Exceptions, Creating own Exception classes. MULTI

THREADING: Concepts of Thread, Thread life cycle, creating threads using Thread class and Runnable interface, Synchronization, Thread priorities, Inter Thread communication. UNIT - IV AWT CONTROLS: The AWT class hierarchy, user interface components- Labels, Button, Text Components, Check Box, Check Box Group, Choice, List Box, Panels – Scroll Pane, Menu, Scroll Bar. Working with Frame class, Color, Fonts and layout managers. EVENT

HANDLING: Events, Event sources, Event Listeners, Event Delegation Model (EDM), Handling Mouse and Keyboard Events, Adapter classes, Inner classes. UNIT - V SWINGS: Introduction to Swings, Hierarchy of swing components. Containers, Top level containers - JFrame, JWindow, JDialog, JPanel, JButton, JToggleButton, JCheckBox,

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 155

JRadioButton, JLabel, JTextField, JTextArea, JList, JComboBox, JScrollPane. APPLETS:

Life cycle of an Applet, Differences between Applets and Applications, Developing applets, simple applet. TEXT BOOKS: 1. Herbert schildt (2010), The complete reference, 7th edition, Tata Mc graw Hill, New

Delhi REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Head First Java, O’rielly publications 2. T. Budd (2009), An Introduction to Object Oriented Programming, 3rd edition, Pearson

Education, India. 3. J. Nino, F. A. Hosch (2002), An Introduction to programming and OO design using Java,

John Wiley & sons, New Jersey. 4. Y. Daniel Liang (2010), Introduction to Java programming, 7th edition, Pearson

education, India.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 156

14.8 COURSE PLAN: At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes.

Lecture No.

Course Learning Outcomes

Topic Reference Blooms

Level

1 a JAVA BASICS: Review of Object oriented concepts

T1 1 & 2

2 a,b History of Java, Java buzzwords

T1,R2 1,2,

3 a JVM architecture

T1,R2 1, 2,

4 a, c Data types

T1 1,2 & 3

5 a Variables, Scope and life time of variables

T1 1,2 & 3

6 a Arrays

T1 1,2

7 b Operators

T1,R2 1,2 & 3

8 b Control statements

T1 1,2 & 3

9 b,c Arrays

T1,R2 1,2 & 3

10 a,d

Type conversion and casting simple java program

T1,R2 1,2 & 3

11 a,d Constructors, methods

T1,R2 1,2,3,4,5 & 6

12 a,d Static block, Static Data, Static Method

T1,R2 1,2

13 a,d,f

String and String Buffer Classes Using Java API Document

T1,R2 1,2,3,4,5 & 6

14 a,b,c

INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM: Basic concepts, Types of inheritance

T1 1,2

15 a,d,e Member access rules

T1 1,2

16 a,e Usage of this and Super key word

T1,R2 1,2,3

17 b,d Method Overloading, Method overriding

T1,R2 1,2 3 & 4

18 a,d Abstract classes

T1 1,2 3 & 4

19 a,f Dynamic method dispatch

T1,R2 1,2 & 3

20 a,e Usage of final keyword

T1,R2 1,2,3

21 d

PACKAGES AND INTERFACES: Defining package, Access protection

T1 1,2

22 c,d Importing packages

T1, R2 T1

1,2,3,4

23 a,d,e Defining and Implementing interfaces

T1 1,2,3,4

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 157

24 a,f Extending interfaces

T1,R2 1,2,3,4

25 b,c I / O STREAMS: Concepts of streams

T1 1,2

26 a,d,f Stream classes- Byte and Character stream

T1,R2 1,,4,5

27 a,e Reading console Input and Writing Console output

T1,R2

1,2,3

28 a,d File Handling

T2,R2 ,5 & 6

29 a,d EXCEPTION HANDLING: Exception types

T1,R2 1,3

30 a,d Usage of Try, Catch

T1 2,3

31 a,d Throw, Throws and Finally keywords

1,4& 6

32 a,e,f Built-in Exceptions

T1 1,2,3

33 e,f Creating own Exception classes

T1,R2 2,3

34 d,f

MULTI THREADING: Concepts of Thread, Thread life cycle

T1 1,2

35 a,e,f

Creating threads using Thread class and Runnable interface

T1 1,2,3,4,5 & 6

36 b,c,e Synchronization

T1 1,2

37 a,e,f Thread priorities

T1 1,2,3

38 a,c,d,e,f Inter Thread communication.

T1 1,2,3,4

39 a,d,e,f AWT CONTROLS: The AWT class hierarchy

T1 1,2,

40 a,d,f

User interface components- Labels, Button, Text Components

T1 2,3,4

41 a,d,e,f Check Box, Check Box Group, Choice List Box

T1 3,4,&5

42 a,d,e,f Panels – Scroll Pane, Menu, Scroll Bar

T1 1,2,3,6

43 a,d,f Working with Frame class, Color, Fonts

T1 2,4,5

44 a,d Layout managers

T1 1,3, 4

45 a,d

EVENT HANDLING: Events, Event sources, Event Listeners, Event Delegation Model (EDM)

T1 1,2,4 & 5

46 a,d,e,f Handling Mouse and Keyboard Events

T1 1,2,3,4,&5

47 a,e Adapter classes, Inner classes

T1 1,2,3&6

48 a,b

SWINGS: Introduction to Swings, Hierarchy of swing components.

T1 1,2,3

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 158

49 b,c Containers, Top level containers - JFrame, JWindow,

T1 1,2

50 d,e JDialog, JPanel,

T1 1,2,4

51 a,d,f JButton, JToggleButton,

T1 1,2,3

52 a,d JCheckBox, JRadioButton

T1 1,2,3,4

53 a,d JLabel, JTextField, JTextArea

T1 1,2,3.

54 a,d,f JList, JComboBox, JScrollPane

T1 1,2,5

55 a,d,f APPLETS: Life cycle of an Applet

T1 1,2,6

56 a,d,f

Differences between Applets and Applications, Developing applets simple applet.

T1 1,2,4

14.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Course Outcomes

a b C d e f

I S

II H

III S H

IV S

V S H

VI H H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related 14.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J k L M N

a H S S

b S H S

c S S

d H S S S

e S H S

f H S S S S

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 159

14.11 MAPPING OF BLOOM TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

Blooms

Taxonomy

1. Remembering /

Knowledge:

Recall or retrieve previous learned information.

Key Words: Choose, Define, Find, How, Label, List, Match, Name, Omit, Recall, Relate, Select, Show, Spell, Tell, What, When, Where, Which, Who, Why

2. Understanding /

Comprehension :

Comprehending the meaning, translation, interpolation, and interpretation of instructions and problems. State a problem in one's own words.

Key Words: Classify, Compare, Contrast, Demonstrate, Explain, Extend, Illustrate, Infer, Interpret, Outline, Relate, Rephrase, Show, Summarize, Translate

3. Applying /

Application:

Use a concept in a new situation or unprompted use of an abstraction. Applies what was learned in the classroom into novel situations in the work place.

Key Words: Apply, Build, Choose, Construct, Develop, Experiment, with, Identify, Interview, Make use of, Model, Organize, Plan, Select, Solve, Utilize

4. Analyzing /

Analysis :

Separates material or concepts into component parts so that its organizational structure may be understood. Distinguishes between facts and inferences.

Key Words: Analyze, Assume, Categorize, Classify, Compare, Conclusion, Contrast, Discover, Dissect, Distinguish, Divide, Examine, Function, Inference, Inspect, List, Motive, Relationships, Simplify, Survey, Take, part, in, Test For, Theme

5. Evaluating /

Evaluation:

Make judgments about the value of ideas or materials.

Key Words: Agree, Appraise, Assess, Award, Choose, Compare, Conclude, Criteria, Criticize, Decide, Deduct, Defend, Determine, Disprove, Estimate, Evaluate, Explain, Importance, Influence, Interpret, Judge, Justify, Mark, Measure, Opinion, Perceive, Prioritize, Prove, Rate, Recommend, Rule on, Select, Support, value

6. Creating /

Synthesis :

Builds a structure or pattern from diverse elements. Put parts together to form a whole, with emphasis on creating a new meaning or structure.

Key Words: Adapt, Build, Change, Choose, Combine, Compile, Compose, Construct, Create, Delete, Design, Develop, Discuss, Elaborate, Estimate, Formulate, Happen, Imagine, Improve, Invent, Make up, Maximize, Minimize, Modify, Original, Originate, Plan, Predict, Propose, Solution, Solve,

Course Outcomes

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 160

Suppose, Test, Theory

a) Identify

b) Apply

c) Analyze

d) Analyze Select

e)

f) Design

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 161

14.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-I

1. A constructor is used to__________ [ B ]

a.destroy memory b.initialize newly created object

c.import packages d.create a JVM for applets

2. In java, the equal sign is used as the _________________operator. [ C

]

a.increment b.decrement c.assignment d.negation

3. To terminate a program, use the java statement: [ D ]

a.System.quit(0); b.System.end(0); c.System.abort(0); d.System.exit(0); 4. What is the argument type of program’s main() method ? [ B ]

(a)Character array (b)String array (c)String (d)Character

5. Which operator is used to create and concatenate string? [ D ]

(a)++ (b)&& (c)& (d)+

6. Which is used to get the value of the instance variables ? [ A ]

(a).(Dot) (b)>> (c)<< (d)->

7. Identify the true statements about finalization. [ C ]

i)A class may have only one finalize method

ii)Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes

iii)Finalizer overloading is not allowed

(a)i&ii&iii (b)i&ii (c)i&iii (d)ii&iii

8. What is a constructor? [ C ]

(a) Constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is

initialized when destroyed.

(b)A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is

initialized.

(c) A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is

initialized when created.

(d)A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is

initialized when called.

9. The default package imported by all java programs is [ A ]

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 162

(a) java.lang (b) java.swing (c) java.awt (d) java.applet

10. Which of the following is illegal: [ A ]

(a)Float f=45.0; (b)float f=45.0; (c)double d=45.0; (d)int i=32; 11. Which of the following statement about the java language is true? [ C ]

a)Both procedural and OOP are supported in java b)Java supports only procedural approach through programming c)Java supports only OOP approach d)None of the above

12. Which of the following statements is false about objects? [ B ]

a)An instance of a class is an object b)Objects can access both static and

instance data

c)Object is the super class of all other classes d)Object do not permit encapsulation 13. Which method can access to private attributes of a class? [ C ] a)Only static method of the same class b)Only instances of the same class c)Only methods those defined in the same class d)Only classes available in the same package 14. What is the value of ‘number’ after the following code fragment execution? [ B ] int number = 0; int number2 = 12

while (number < number2)number = number +1;

a)5 b)12 c)21 d)13

15. Which can be passed as an argument to a function? [ A ]

a)Constant b)Expression c)Other function d)All the above

16. “this” pointer [ D ]

a)Implicitly points to an object b)Can be explicitly used in class

c)Can be used to return an object d)All the above

17. A static function [ C ]

a. Should be called when an object is destroyed

b. Is closely connected with individual objects of a class

c. Can be called using the class name and function name

d. Is used when a dummy object must be created

18. The new operator [ C ]

a) Returns a pointer to the variable b) Creates a variable called new

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 163

c)Obtains memory for a new variable d) Tells how much memory is

available

19. Each object is an instance of a class and each class belong to a _______

[ C]

A)cache B) circular C) hierarchy D) separate

20. The ____________operator is used to create a new object or a new

array. [ D ]

a.instanceOf b.scope c.dot(.) d.new

Unit-2

1. The methods of interface are by default.

A. abstract B. static C. final D. none of these 2. An interface can be declared using keyword

A. class B. interface C. interfaces D.implements

3. To implementsaninterface keyword issued A. extends B. interface C. implements D.implement

4. The variables of interfaces are by default

A.final B. static C.finaland static 5. A classcanimplements interfaces D. all of above

A. only one B. one or more than one C.maximumtwo D. minimum two

6. A method implementation of an interface must be declared as

A. private B.defaultaccess C. public D.protected 7. An interface contains

A. Themethoddefinitions B. The method declaration C. Method declaration anddefinition D. none

8. A class implements an interface but does

not override allthe methods of interfacethen

A. It should be declared as abstractclass

B. It should be declared as finalclass C. It must override all the methods ofinterface D. none ofthese

9. Which of the following istrue A. A class can extend more than oneclass B. A class can implement only oneinterface

C. A class can extend only one class and can

implements

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 164

D.morethan oneinterface D. A class can extend only one class and can implements only

one interface

10. Which of the following characteristics of an object-oriented programming language restricts behavior so that an object can only perform actions that are defined for itsclass?

a. DynamicBinding

b. Polymorphism

c. Inheritance

d. Encapsulation

11. Which of these keyword must be used to inherit a class?

a) super

b) this

c) extent

d) extends

12. Which of these keywords is used to refer to member of base class from a sub class?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 165

a) upper

b) super

c) this

d) None of thementioned 13. A class member declared protected becomes member of subclass ofwhich type?

a) publicmember

b) privatemember

c) protectedmember

d) staticmember 14. Which of these is correct way of inheriting class A by classB?

a) class B + class A

b) class B inherits class A

c) class B extends A

d) class B extends class A 15. Which of the following statements areincorrect?

a) public members of class can be accessed by any code in theprogram.

b) private members of class can only be accessed by other members ofthe class.

c) private members of class can be inherited by a sub class, andbecome protected members in

subclass.

d) protected members of a class can be inherited by a sub class, andbecome private members of the

subclass.

16. What is the output of this program?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 166

intj;

void display() System.out.println(j);

class inheritance_demo

public static void main(Stringargs[])

a) 0

b) 1

c) 2

B obj = newB();

obj.i=1; obj.j=2;

obj.display();

d) CompilationError

17. What is the output of thisprogram?

class A

inti;

class B extends A

intj;

void display()

super.i = j + 1; System.out.println(j

+ " " +i);

class inheritance

public static void main(Stringargs[])

class A

inti;

void display()

System.out.println(i);

class B extends A

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 167

B obj = newB();

obj.i=1; obj.j=2;

obj.display();

a) 22

b) 33

c) 23

d) 32

18. What is the output of thisprogram?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 168

class A

obj.j=2; public inti;

private intj;

class B extends A

void display()

super.j = super.i + 1; System.out.println(super.i

+ " " +super.j);

class inheritance

public static void main(Stringargs[])

B obj = newB();

obj.i=1;

obj.display();

a) 22

b) 33

c) Runtime Error

d) Compilation Error

19. What is the output of this program

20. class A

public int i;

public int j;

A()

i =1;

j =2;

class B extends A

int a;

B()

super();

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 169

class super_use

public static void main(Stringargs[])

B obj = new B(); System.out.println(obj.i +

" " +obj.j)

a) 12

b) 21

c) RuntimeError

d) CompilationError

21. What is the output of thisprogram?

class A

public inti;

protected intj;

class B extends A

intj;

void display()

super.j = 3; System.out.println(i + "

" +j);

class Output

public static void main(Stringargs[])

B obj = newB();

obj.i=1; obj.j=2;

obj.display();

a) 12

b) 21

c) 13

d) 31

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 170

UNIT-3

1. Which of the following statements about the try block in Java isfalse?

a) Some of the statements in a try block will never throw anexception. b) The try block must appear before the catchblocks. c) The try block cannot contain loops orbranches. d) The statements in a try block may throw several types ofexception.

Answer:c

2. Which exception is thrown by the read () method of Input Streamclass? a) Exception. b) ClassNotFoundException. c) readException. d) IOException. Answer:d

3. An exception isan a) abnormal. b) casual. c) unfortunate. d) opposite. Answer:a

condition that arises in acode.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 171

4. is at the top of the exception classhierarchy. a) try. b) throwable. c) exceptionclass. d) catch.

Answer:b

5. User defined exception can be createdusing class. a) catch. b) try. c) throwable. d) get. Answer:c

6. Which of these keywords is not a part of exceptionhandling?. a) finally. b) catch. c) thrown. d) try. Answer:c

7. Exception that is identified during compile time iscalled a) userdefined. b) checked.

c) undefined. d) defined.

exception. Answer:b

8. Which of the following are true about the Error and Exceptionclasses? a) Both classes extendThrowable. b) The Error class is final and the Exception class isnot. c) The Exception class is final and the Error isnot. d) Both classes implementThrowable.

Answer:a

9. Which of the following statements about the try block in Java isfalse? a) Some of the statements in a try block will never throw anexception. b) The try block must appear before the catchblocks. c) The try block cannot contain loops orbranches. d) The statements in a try block may throw several types ofexception.

Answer:c

10. Which two are valid constructors forThread? Thread(Runnable r, String name) Thread() Thread(int

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 172

priority) Thread(Runnable r, ThreadGroup g) Thread(Runnable r, intpriority) a) 1,2 b)2,4 c) 1,3 d)2,5

Answer:a

11. What is the name of the method used to start a threadexecution? a) resume(); b) start(); c) init();

d)run();Answer:b 12. Which cannot directly cause a thread to stopexecuting? a) Calling the wait() method on an object.

b) Calling read() method on an InputStream object. c) Calling the SetPriority() method on a Thread object. d) Calling notify() method on anobject.

Answer:d

13. Which two of the following methods are defined in classThread? start() wait() notify() run() terminate()

a)3,4 b)1,4 c)2,3 d)2,4 Answer:b

14. Which will contain the body of thethread? a)run() b)start() C)stop() d)main()

Answer:a

15. What all gets printed when the following gets compiled and run. Select the threecorrect answers.

public class test public static void main(String args[])

int i=1,j=1; try

i++; j--; if(i/j > 1)

i++; catch(ArithmeticException e)

System.out.println(0); catch(ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException e)

System.out.println(1); catch(Exception e)

System.out.println(2);

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 173

finally

System.out.println(3); System.out.println(4);

a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. 3 e. 4

Answer :a,d,e 16. What all gets printed when the following gets compiled and run. Select the twocorrect answers.

public class test public static void main(String args[])

int i=1,j=1; try

i++; j--; if(i ==j)

i++; catch(ArithmeticException e)

System.out.println(0);

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 174

catch(ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException e)

System.out.println(1); catch(Exception e)

System.out.println(2); finally

System.out.println(3); System.out.println(4);

a. 0 b. 1 c. 3 d. 4 Answer : c,d

17. Which of these is a legal definition of a method named m assuming it throwsIOException, and returns void. Also assume that the method does not take any arguments. Select the one correctanswer.

a. void m() throwsIOException b. void m() throwIOException c. void m(void) throwsIOException d. void m() throwsIOException Answer :d

18. In which all cases does an exception gets generated. Select the two correctanswers. int i = 0, j =1;

a. if((i == 0) || (j/i ==1)) b. if((i == 0) | (j/i ==1)) c. if((i != 0) && (j/i ==1)) d. if((i != 0) & (j/i == 1)) Answer : b,d

19. Which of the following statements are true. Select the two correctanswers. a. The wait method defined in the Thread class, can be used to convert a threadfrom

Running state to Waitingstate. b. The wait(), notify(), and notifyAll() methods must be executed insynchronized

code. c. The notify() and notifyAll() methods can be used to signal and movewaiting

threads to ready-to-runstate. d. The Thread class is an abstractclass. Answer :b,c

20. Which keyword when applied on a method indicates that only one thread should executethe method at a time. Select the one correctanswer.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 175

a. transient

b. volatile c. synchronized d. native

Answer :d 21. Which of these statements are true. Select the two correctanswers.

a. For each try block there must be at least one catch blockdefined. b. A try block may be followed by any number of finallyblocks. c. A try block must be followed by at least one finally or catchblock. d. Ifbothcatchandfinallyblocksaredefined,catchblockmustprecedethefinally

block

Answer : c,d 22. What should be done to invoke the run() method on a thread for an object derived fromthe Thread class. Select the one correctanswer.

a. The run() method should be directly invoked on theObject. b. The start() method should be directly invoked on theObject. c. The init() method should be directly invoked on theObject. d. The creation of the object using the new operator would create a new threadand

invoke its run()method. Answer :b

23. What is the default priority of a newly createdthread. a. MIN_PRIORITY (which is defined as 1 in the Threadclass.) b. NORM_PRIORITY (which is defined as 5 in the Threadclass.) c. MAX_PRIORITY (which is defined as 10 in the Threadclass.) d. A thread inherits the priority of its parentthread. Answer :d

24. The kinds ofExceptions a) checked b) unchecked c) both a &b d) none Answer:c

25. Each defines a separate path ofexecution. a) Thread b) Process c) object d)none Answer:a

UNIT-IV

1. All collection classes in java.util package are implementation classes ofdifferent

interfaces

a)True a)False

ANSWER –True 2. DeflaterOutputStrem and InflaterInputStream classes are available in whichpackage?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 176

a)java.io b)java.util c)java.io.zip d)java.util.zip ANSWER d)java.util.zip

3. Process of storing the object contain into the file is knownas

a)synchronization b)serialization c)zip d)doping

ANSWER b)serialization 4. Static and transient variable cannot beserialized

a)Yes

b)No

ANSWER a)Yes

5. All components from javax.swing are developedin

a)C++ b)C c)pascal d)purejava 6. FileOutputStream class store the data in the formof

a)character b)file c)bytes d)bit

ANSWER c)bytes 7. What is the default buffer size used by any bufferedclass?

a)128 bytes b)256 bytes c)512 bytes

d)1024bytes

ANSWER c) 512bytes 8. The main classes implementing List interfaceare:

a) Stack b) Vector c) ArrayList

d)All Answer:d

9. Main classes implementing Set interfaceare:

a) EnumSet b) HashSet c) TreeSet d)All

Answer:d

10. The class is an abstract class that defines a data structure for mapping keys tovalues.

a) Dictionary b) Vector c) ArrayList

d)All Answer:a

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 177

11. which is used to run simple SQL statements like select andupdate.

a) Statement b) Prepared Statement c) Callable Statement d)none

Answer:a 12. A SQL statement is pre-compiled and stored in a Prepared Statementobject.

a) Statement b) Prepared Statement c) Callable Statement d)none

Answer:b 13. is used to execute the stored procedures. [TCS2012]

a) Statement b) Prepared Statement c) Callable Statement d)none

Answer:c 14. Which of these API represents that software programs can follow to communicate witheach other?

A) Interfaces B) Classes C) Both A &B D) None of theabove

ANSWER: C) Both A &B

15. How many types of JDBC driversavailable? A) 3 B) 4 C) 2 D) 5

ANSWER: B)4

16. In the following JDBC drivers which is known as partially javadriver?

A) JDBC-ODBC bridgedriver B) Native-APIdriver C) Network Protocoldriver D) Thindriver

ANSWER: B) Native-APIdriver

17. Which driver converts JDBC calls directly into the vendor-specific databaseprotocol? A) Native-APIdriver B) Network Protocoldriver C) Thindriver D) Both B &C

ANSWER: C) Thindriver

18. Why java program cannot directly communicate with an ODBCdriver? A) ODBC written in C#language B) ODBC written in Clanguage C) ODBC written in C++language D) None of theabove

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 178

ANSWER: B) ODBC written in Clanguage

19. Which method of Class class is used to register the driver class, This method is usedto dynamically load the driver class? [Emphasis2014] A) forName() B) getConnection() C) createStatement() D) executeQuery()

ANSWER: A)forName()

20. This is an example of prepared statement interface that ? PreparedStatement stmt=con.prepareStatement("select * fromemp"); ResultSetrs=stmt.executeQuery();

while(rs.next()) System.out.println(rs.getInt(1)+""+rs.getString(2));

A) deletes therecord B) retrieve therecord C) updates therecord D) inserts therecord

ANSWER: B) retrieve therecord

UNIT-V

1. When we invoke repaint() for a JAVA.awt.Component object, the AWT invokes themethod a) update(). b) draw(). c) show(). d)paint(). 2. The setBackground() method is part of the following class in JAVA.awtpackage. a) Component. b) Graphics. c) Applet. d)Container. 3. Which of the following methods can be used to draw the outline of a square within a JAVA.awt.Component object? a) drawLine(). b) fillRect(). c) drawString(). d)drawPolygon(). 4. AWT standsfor . a) abstractwindowtoolkit. b) abstractwindowtoolbar. c) access windowtoolkit. d) access windowtoolbar. 5. What is different between a Java applet and a Javaapplication? A. An application can in general be trusted whereas an appletcan't. B. An applet must be executed in abrowserenvironment. C. An applet is not able to access the files of the computer it runson D.All 6. AnApplethasitsLayoutManagersettothedefaultofFlowLayout.Whatcode

wouldbethecorrecttochangeto another LayoutManager? A. setLayoutManager (new GridLayout());. B. setLayout (newGridLayout(2,2));. C. setGridLayout (2,2,)). D. setBorderLayout();.

7. An is a special kind of Java program that isdesigned to be transmitted over the internet. a) viewlet. b) applet. c) servlet. d)object.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 179

8. Can you write a Java class that could be used both as an applet as well as anapplication? a) Yes b)No

9. An isaprogramwrittenintheJavaprogramminglanguagethatcanbeincludedinanHTMLpage,much in the same way an image is included in apage. a) Applet b) complier c) constructor d)none 10. The classistheabstractbaseclassforallgraphicscontextsthatallowanapplicationtodrawontocomponents that are realized on various devices, as well as onto off-screenimages. a) Graphics b) Applet c) Swing d)none 11. A graphical user interface is built of graphical elementscalled . a) Content b) component c) item d)none 12. contains and controls the layout ofcomponents a) Container b) component c) Panel d)none 13. The AWT provides containerclasses.a) 2 b) 3 c) 4

d)5

14. An instanceofthe class provides a container to which to addcomponents a) Window b) Dialog c) Panel d)none 15. The AWT provides layoutmanagers. a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d)5 16. The BorderLayoutclasshas zones. a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d)5

17. component does not need any native code toimplement. a) Swing b) Applet c) AWT d)none 18. components are alwaysrectangular. a) Swing b) Applet c) AWT d)none 19. The architecture is used consistently throughout the swing componentset. a) mcv b) mvc c) cvm d)none 20. The class is at the top of the hierarchy of all visual components contained in theJFC. a) JComponent b)JButton c) JText d)JMenu.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 180

ASSIGNMENT

S.No. Questio

n Blooms Taxono

my

Cours

e

Outco

UNIT –I

S.No. Questio

n Blooms Taxono

my

Cours

e

Outco1 Explain creation of thread using runnable interface with Understa 12

“ ”“ ”“ ”

–

–

n

ss

–

1 List Object Oriented Concepts ? Discuss Data abstractions With anexample.

Remember 3

2 Differntiate Procedure Oriented and Object Oriented? Understand

3

3 Explain about Type conversion indetail Understand

3 4 Explain Scope and Lifetime of a Variable injava Understa

nd 3

5 Discuss JavaBuzzWord. Remember

3 6 Explain Constructor. Explain in detail about

ConstructorOverloading. Understa

nd 3

7 Define Encapsulation ? Describe with anexample? Remember

3 8 Describe Static fields and Methods? Explain with anexample? Understa

nd 3

9 Explain Garbage collection injava? Understand

3

1

Discuss String class? Explain with anexample? Understand

3

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 181

S.No. Questio

n Blooms Taxono

my

Cours

e

Outco3 Develop an applet that receives an integer in one text field and computes its factorial value and returns it in another text field, when the button named “compute” is clicked using

Apply

8

4 Develop an applet that receives an integer in one text field and computes its factorial value and returns it in another text field, when the button named “compute” is clicked using

Apply

8

5 Define JFrame, JApplet, JDialog and Jpanel, Jbutton, JLabel, JTextField and JtextArea? Write a java program that simulates a traffic light. The program lets the user select one of three lights: red, yellow, or green with radio buttons. On selecting a button an appropriate message with “STOP” or “READY” or ”GO” should appear above the buttons in selected color.

Apply

8

6 Describe Layout manager types – border, grid, flow? Write a Java program that works as a simple calculator. Use a grid layout to arrange buttons for the digits and for the +,-,*, % operations. Add a text field to display the result. Handle any

Apply

8

7 Describe Delegation event model? Describe istherelationship between Event sources andListeners?

Understand

8

8 Describe events for handling a button click and mouse events withanexamples

Apply 8

9 Explain applet life cycle? Difference between applet andapplication?

Understand

8

10

Explain applet securityissues? Understand

8

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 182

14.13 TUTORIALS

PART – A (Short AnswerQuestions) S.No Questio

n Blooms

TaxonomyLe

vel

Cours

e

OutcoUNIT -I

1 DefineOOP? Understand

2

2 DistinguishbetweenprocedurallanguageandOOPs? Understand

8

3 DefineEncapsulation? Understand

4

4 DefineInheritance? Understand

2

5 DefinePolymorphism? Understand

3

6 List advantages ofOOP? Understand

2

7 List disadvantages ofOOP? Understand

2

8 Write history ofjava? Knowledge

8

9 Describe a datatype? Understand

4

10

Describe aconstant? Understand

2

11

Describe scope and life time ofvariables? Understand

3

1 List types ofoperators? Understand

2

2 Define typeconversion? Understand

8

3 Define typecasting? Understand

4 4 Define enumeratedtypes? Understan

d 2

5 Define anarray? Understand

3 6 Define thisreference? Understan

d 5

7 Defineconstructor? Understand

5

8 Definerecursion? Understand

5 9 Define garbagecollection? Understan

d 5

UNIT –II 1 DefineInheritance? Understa

nd 3

2 List types of inheritances injava? Understand

3 3 Write Member accessrules Remembe

r 3

4 Write Uses of ‘Super’keyword Understand

3 5 Write using ‘final’ keyword withinheritance Understa

nd 2

6 Write about Objectclass Understand

8

7 Define abstractclasses? Understand

4 8 Definepolymorphism? Understa

nd 2

9 Define dynamicbinding? Understand

3

10

Define methodoverriding? Understand

5

11

Differencebetweeninterfacesvs.Abstractclasses

Understand

5 12

Defineinterface? Understand

5 13

Define innerclasses? Understand

5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 183

14

Define static innerclasses? Understand

2 15

Define apackage? Understand

8

16

Write creating, importingpackages? Understand

4 17

Define abstractmethods? Understand

2

18

DefineCLASSPATH? Understand

3

19

List advantages ofinheritance? Understand

3 20

Write implementing aninterface Understand

3

UNIT -III 1 DefineException? Understa

nd 5

2 Distinguish between exception anderror? Understand

2 3 Write benefits of exceptionhandling Understa

nd 8

4 Write the classification ofexceptions Understand

4 5 Define checkedexceptions? Understa

nd 2

6 Define uncheckedexceptions? Understand

3

7 Define built inexceptions? Understand

5 8 Write the usage of try andcatch Understa

nd 5

9 Write the usage of throw, throws andfinally Understand

5 10

Distinguish between throwand throws? Understand

5

11

Distinguish between process andthread? Understand

10 12

Write threadstates Understand

10

13 Write creation ofthread? Understand

10 14 Define producer consumerproblem? Understa

nd 2

15 Define inter-threadcommunication? Understand

8 16 Write How threads aresynchronized? Understa

nd 4

17 Write threadpriorities Understand

2

18 How many ways can thread beCreated? Understand

3 19 Write the alive() and join()method Understa

nd 10

20 Write thread class implements Runnableinterface

Understand

10

UNIT –IV 1 Definecollections? Understa

nd 11

2 Define Java collection Framework. Understand

11

3 Define Array List withsyntax Understand

11

4 Define Vector withsyntax. Understand

11 5 Define hash table withsyntax. Understa

nd 2

6 Define stack withsyntax. Understand

8 7 Define enumeration withsyntax. Understa

nd 4

8 WriteIterator. Understand

2

9 Write the function ofstringTokenizer. Understand

3

10 Define randomclass. Understand

11 11 Define Scannerclass. Understa

nd 11

12 Define Calendarclass. Understand

2 13 Define Propertiesclass Understa

nd 8

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 184

14 DefineStream? Understand

4

15 Define bytestream? Understand

2 16 Define characterstream? Understa

nd 3

17 Define text input/outputfile? Understand

11 18 DefineJDBC? Understa

nd 7

19 List types of JDBCdrivers. Understand

7 20 Define random accessfile? Understa

nd 11

UNIT -V 1 Define AWT classhierarchy? Understa

nd 2

2 Distinguish between swings VsAWT? Understand

8

3 Write hierarchy forswing? Understand

4 4 Definecomponents? Understa

nd 2

5 Definecontainers? Understand

3

6 Define JFrame, JApplet, JDialog andJpanel? Understand

8

7 Define some of swingcomponents? Understand

8 8 DefineJbutton,JLabel,JTextFieldandJtextArea

? Understa

nd 8

9 Define Layoutmanagement? Knowledge

2

10 ListLayoutmanagertypes–borderandgridflow?

Understand

8 11 WriteEvents,Eventsources,Eventclasses Understa

nd 4

12 Write EventListeners Understand

2 13 DescribetherelationshipbetweenEventsourcesandListeners? Understa

nd 3

14 Define Delegation eventmodel? Knowledge

8

15 Describe events for handling a buttonclick? Understand

2 16 Describe events for handling mouseevents? Understa

nd 8

17 Define adapterclass? Knowledge

4 18 Distinguish between applet andapplication? Understa

nd 2

19 Write applet lifecycle Understand

3 20 Describe applet securityissues? Understa

nd 9

PART – B (Long AnswerQuestions)

S.No Questio

n Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e UNIT –I

1 Describethecharacteristicsofobjectorientedprogrammingconcepts?

Understand

2 2 Describethefeatures(buzzwords)ofJavaProgramminglangua

ge? Understan

d 8

3 Write the Differences between Java andC++. Understand

4

4 WriteJavaisapureobjectorientedprogramminglanguage Understand

2 5 DistinguishbetweenapplicationsandappletsinJava? Understan

d 3

6 Write about thisreference. Understand

1 7 Writeaboutthemethodoverloadingwithanexample. Understan

d 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 185

8 Writeabouttheconstructoroverloadingwithanexample. Understand

2 9 Write the concept of arrays with anexample. Understan

d 8

10 Write about string class with anexample. Understand

4

11 Writeabouttheconsoleinputandoutputwithanexample. Apply 2 12 Write about simple stand aloneprograms. Apply 3

13 Write about conditionalstatements. Understand

1 14 Write about loops with anexample. Understan

d 1

15 Writeaboutthebreakandcontinuestatementswithanexample. Understand

1

16 Writeabouttheoperatorhierarchywithanexample. Understand

1 17 Writeaboutalltheoperatorsinjavawithanexample. Understan

d 2

18 Define static field? Write with anexample. Knowledge

8

19 Define static method? Write with anexample. Knowledge

4

20 Definetypeconversion,typecastingwithanexample? Knowledge

2

UNIT –II

1 DefineInheritance?DiscussitsusesandHierarchicalabstractions?

Knowledge

3

2 Listtypesofinheritancesinjava?Writeeachofthemindetail. Understand

3

3 Write about Object class indetail Understand

2 4 Write Uses of ‘Super’ keyword , discuss accessing the

member of a Understan

d 8

superclass 5 Define package? Discuss itsadvantages? Knowled

ge 4

6 Write different Types ofPackages? Understand

2 7 Definedynamicbinding?Writewithanexample? Knowled

ge 3

8 Definemethodoverriding?Writewithanexample? Knowledge

3

9 DefineAbstractclasses?Writewithanexample? Knowledge

2

10 Defineinterface?Writewithanexample? Knowledge

8

11 Define inner classes? Write with anexample? Knowledge

4

12 Write in detail about creating , importingpackages Understand

2 13 Write how packages areaccessed Understa

nd 3

14 Write extending interfaces with anexample Understand

12 15 Defineinterface?WriteDifferencesbetweenclassesandinterfac

es? Knowled

ge 2

16 Writefinalclasses,methodswithanexample Understand

8

17 Write inheritance with anexample Understand

4 18 Write how to preventinheritance Understa

nd 2

19 Write Member access rules with anexample Understand

3 20 Write working procedure ofCLASSPATH Understa

nd 3

UNIT -

III

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 186

1 Write about exception handlingmechanisms Understand

2

2 Write try, catch , and finally with anexample Understand

8 3 Define throw keyword? Write with anexample Understa

nd 4

4 Definethrowskeyword?Writewithanexample Understand

2

5 Writeaprogramtoimplementbuiltinexceptions? Apply 3 6 Write creation ofthread Understa

nd 3

7 Writewithanexamplehowjavaperformsthreadsynchronization?

Apply 8

8 Writeproducerconsumerproblemwithanexample Apply 4 9 Write aboutmultithreading Understa

nd 2

10 Write the life cycle of athread Understand

3

UNIT –IV 1 WritetheJavaCollectionframe workwithanexample. Understa

nd 2

2 Write ArrayList with anexample. Remember

8

3 Write Vector with anexample. Remember

4

4 Write hash table with anexample. Remember

2 5 Write stack with anexample. Remembe

r 3

6 Write enumeration with anexample. Remember

11

7 Write iterator with anexample. Remember

11 8 Write String Tokenizer with anexample. Remembe

r 11

9 Write Random with anexample. Remember

11

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 187

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e 10 Write Scanner class with anexample. Remembe

r 11

11 Write Calender class with anexample. Remember

2

12 Write Properties class with anexample. Remember

8 13 Write text input/output fileoperations. Remembe

r 4

14 Write binary input/output fileoperations. Remember

2

15 Write random access fileoperations. Remember

3 16 Write File management using Fileclass. Remembe

r 11

17 Write JDBC with anexample. Understand

11 18 WritedifferenttypesofJDBCdriverswithdiagrams. Understa

nd 11

19 Write JDBC example for querying the database and processing the results.

Apply 11

20 Write JDBC example for updatingdata. Apply 11

UNIT –V 1 Write in detail about hierarchy forswing? Understa

nd 8

2 Write in detail about hierarchy forawt? Understand

2 3 Write in detail about Layoutmanagement? Understa

nd 8

4 Write a program for handling a buttonclicks? Understand

4 5 Write a program for handling mouseevents? Understa

nd 2

6 Write in detail about Events, Event sources and Eventclasses

Apply 3 7 Write in detail about Event sources andListeners Apply 8

8 Write program for simpleapplet? Apply 8 9 Write a program for passing parametersto applet? Apply 8

10 WriteaprogramtoCafactorialofanumberusingswing components?

Apply 8

11 WriteaprogramtoCafactorialofanumberusingawtcomponents?

Apply 8

PART – C (Problem Solving and Critical ThinkingQuestions) S.No Questio

n Blooms

TaxonomyLevel

Course OutcoUNIT –I

1 Student john12 = new Student(1001, "John",12); Student john13 = new Student(1002, "John",13); System.out.println("comparingJohn,12andJohn,13withcompareTo :" +john12.compareTo(john13));

Understand

1

2 switch (N %6)

case3:System.out.println(“Wednesday”); default: System.out.println (“Sunday”); case 5: System.out.println(“Friday”);

Understand

1

3 for(i = 1;i < 3;i++)

Apply 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 188

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e for( j = 1; j < 3;j++

for(k = 1; k < 3;k++)

if(j == k) break;

else

System.out.println (“%d%d%d”, i, j,k); continue;

4 Explain the following code whether it is legal in Java? Is it an example of method overloading oroverriding? public String getDescription(Objectobj)

returnobj.toString; public String getDescription(Stringobj)

returnobj; and public void getDescription(Stringobj)

returnobj;

Understa

nd

1

5 Analyze thefollowingprogramandfindtheoutputof theprogram? public classCounterAtomic

private AtomicLong counter = newAtomicLong();

public voidincrement()

counter.incrementAndGet();

public longget()

returncounter.get();

Analyze 1

UNIT -II 1 Write the java program to print the Armstrong number

using method overriding?

Understand

1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 189

2 Explain the following code legalin Java? classOuterClass

private int privInt =10; public voidcreateInnerClass()

Understand

1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 190

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e InnerClass inClass =

newInnerClass(); inClass.accessOuter();

classInnerClass

public voidaccessOuter()

System.out.println("The outer class's privIntis " + privInt);

public static void main(String[]args) //create instance of outer classfirst:

OuterClass outClass = new OuterClass(); OuterClass.InnerClassinner=outClass.newInnerClas

3 Analyze thefollowingprogramandfindtheoutputof theprogram? classA

//Members and methodsdeclarations.

class B extends A

//Members and methods from Aare inherited.

//Members and methods declarationsof B.

class A

public A() System.out.println("NewA");

class B extends A

public B() super(); System.out.println("New B");

Analyze 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 191

4 Illustrate theoutputofthe followingprogram? interfaceMyInterface

public void method1(); public voidmethod2();

class XYZ implementsMyInterface

public voidmethod1()

Apply 1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 192

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e System.out.println("implementationofmethod1");

public voidmethod2()

System.out.println("implementation ofmethod2"); public static void main(Stringarg[])

MyInterface obj = newXYZ(); obj.method1();

5 Describe how do we set the path for class which is present in another class?

Knowledge

5

UNIT -

III 1 Explain theoutputofthefollowingprogram? importjava.util.Scanner; classDivision

public static void main(String[]args)

int a, b,result; Scanner input = new Scanner(System.in); System.out.println("Input two integers"); a =input.nextInt(); b = input.nextInt();

Understand

1

2 Write a java program to book the online cinema ticket by using thread synchronization?

Knowledge

1

3 Describe theneedforrethrowinganexceptioninjava

Knowledge

1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 193

4 Explain theoutputofthefollowingprogram? classExceptions

public static void main(String[]args) Stringlanguages[]=

"C","C++","Java","Perl","Python"; try

for (int c = 1; c <= 5;c++)

System.out.println(languages[c]);

catch (Exceptione)

System.out.println(e);

Understand

1

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 194

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e 5 Class Allocate

public static void main(String[]args)

try

long data[] = newlong[1000000000];

catch (Exceptione)

System.out.println(e); finally

System.out.println("finallyblockwillexecutealways.");

Understand 1

UNIT –IV 1 Describe fastest type of JDBCdriver? Remember 2

2 Analyze thefollowingprogramandfindtheoutputof theprogram? public classTest

public static void main(String[]args)

System.out.println(Math.min(Double.MIN_VALUE, 0.0d));

Apply 2

3 Analyze thefollowingprogramandfindtheoutputoftheprogram? public classTest

public static void main(String[] args) throwsException

char[] chars = new char[] '\u0097'; String str = new String(chars); byte[] bytes =str.getBytes();

Apply 4

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 195

4 Compare theoutputbeforeaddingandafteradding? importjava.util.*;

public classArrayListExample

public static void main(Stringargs[])

ArrayList<String> obj = newArrayList<String>(); obj.add("Ajeet"); obj.add("Harry"); System.out.println("Currently the array list has

Remember 8

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 196

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e obj.add(1,"Justin");

obj.remove("Chaitanya"); obj.remove("Harry"); System.out.println("Current array listis:"+obj); obj.remove(1); System.out.println("Current array listis:"+obj);

5 Find whethertheJDBC-ODBCBridgebeusedwithapplets? Remember

11

UNIT -V 1 Predict theoutput

usingbelowcodeandwhathappensifbelowcodeis not used in GUIprograms? publicvoidwindowClosing(WindowEvente)

dispose(); System.exit(

Understand

9

2 Describe whichcontainersuseaborderLayoutastheirdefaultlayout?

Remember

8

3 Compare Java applet and a Javaapplication? Remember

9

4 Explain theoutputofthefollowingprogram? importjava.applet.*; importjava.awt.*;

public class Main extendsApplet

public void paint(Graphicsg)

g.drawString("Welcome in JavaApplet.",40,20);

<HTML> <HEAD> </HEAD> <BODY> <div> <APPLET CODE="Main.class" WIDTH="800"HEIGHT="500"> </APPLET> </div>

Understand

9

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 197

5 Explain the usage of the following code? publicvoidactionPerformed(ActionEventae)

try

num = Integer.parseInt(input.getText()); sum = sum+num; input.setText("");

Understand

3

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 198

S.No Question

Blooms

TaxonomyLe

Cours

e

catch(NumberFormatExceptione)

lbl.setForeground(Color.red); lbl.setText("InvalidEntry!");

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 199

15. ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (A2HS16)

15.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Title ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE Course Code ANHS16

Regulation MLR 15

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

3 - - -

Course Coordinator Dr. J. VENKATESHWARLU

Team of Instructors Dr. J.VENKATESHWARLU

15.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

Environmental study is interconnected; interrelated and interdependent subject. Hence, it is multidisciplinary in nature. The present course is framed by expert committee of UGC under the direction of Honorable Supreme Court to be as a core module syllabus for all branches of higher education and to be implemented in all universities over India. The course is designed to create environmental awareness and consciousness among the present generation to become environmental responsible citizens. The course description is: multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies, Natural Resources: Renewable and non-renewable resources; Ecosystems; Biodiversity and its conservation; Environmental Pollution; Social Issues and the Environment; Human Population and the Environment; pollution control acts and Field Work. The course is divided into five chapters for convenience of academic teaching followed by field visits.

15.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 3 4 Knowledge of basic sciences

15.3. A) MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End

Exam Marks

Total Marks

25 75 100

15.3 B) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 200

a

Students will be able to Identify various

components of Ecosystem and

Understand their interconnections.

Examination,

Assignments

b

Students will be able to Understand the

issues of Non renewable energy

resources and try to Apply gained

knowledge in energy efficiency projects.

Examination ,

Assignments

c

Students will be able to Understand

species which are Endangered and

Endemic. Students will improve to

conservation skills and learn the

Ecosystems the animals adapt .

Examination ,

Assignments

d

Students will be able to implement

knowledge about pollution and analyze

or Examine which areas are more

polluted through Analysis of Data by

CPCB.

Examination ,

Assignments

e

Students will be able to Understand

various ACTS formulated by Govt. of

INDIA and analyze various scenarios for

Evaluating and Applying their

knowledge in conserving Energy and

Environmental Protection.

Examination ,

Assignments

15.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 1 week 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 1 week 5

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

I)To impart basic concept of Ecosystem and Functional attributes. To Explain key components ecosystem and Major ecosystems

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 201

II)To recall and recognize resources of renewable and non renewable. III)To facilitate students in understanding various families of Biodiversity. IV)To facilitate students in understanding the problems with pollution. V)To impart the concept of sustainability and summarize which factors are causing threat to sustainability.

15.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms

Level

To impart basic concept of Ecosystem and Functional attributes. To Explain key components ecosystem and Major ecosystems

Students will be able to Identify

various components of Ecosystem

and Understand their

interconnections.

BL 1 & 2

To recall and recognize resources of renewable and non renewable.

Students will be able to

Understand the issues of Non

renewable energy resources and try

to Apply gained knowledge in

energy efficiency projects.

BL 1, 2, & 3

To facilitate students in understanding various families of Biodiversity.

Students will be able to

Understand species which are

Endangered and Endemic. students

will improve to conservation skills

and learn the Ecosystems the

animals adapt .

BL 1, 2, & 6

To facilitate students in understanding the problems with pollution.

Students will be able to implement

knowledge about pollution and

analyze or Examine which areas

are more polluted through

Analysis of Data by CPCB.

BL 1, 2, 3 & 4

To impart the concept of sustainability and summarize which factors are causing threat to sustainability.

Students will be able to

Understand various ACTS

formulated by Govt. of INDIA and

analyze various scenarios for

Evaluating and Applying their

knowledge in conserving Energy

and Environmental Protection.

BL 2,4 & 5

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 202

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply, develop BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create 15.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

a An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, Computing, Science and engineering to solve Computer Science and Engineering problems

N Assignments,

b An ability to design and conduct engineering experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data.

N Assignments, Exercises

c An ability to design and construct a hardware and software system, component, or process to meet desired needs, within realistic constraints

N ----------

d Graduates will demonstrate an ability to visualize and work on laboratory and Multi-disciplinary tasks individually or as a member within the teams

N Assignments

e

An ability to demonstrate skills to use the techniques, modern engineering Tools, Software and equipments necessary to analyze computer engineering Problems.

N Assignments

f An understanding of professional, social and ethical responsibility.

H Seminars

g

An ability to recognize the global issues like green initiatives and

alternate energy sources and to take technology to villages and to

recognize the rural requirements.

N Assignments

h The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context

H Oral

i

Graduate will develop confidence for self education and acquire new knowledge in the computing discipline and ability and practice for Multi-disciplinary tasks as a member within the teams

N Assignments

j To communicate effectively H Oral

k An ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering

tools necessary for Engineering practice N Assignments

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 203

l

Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive

examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.

N ----------

m

The use of current application software and the design and use of operating systems and the analysis, design, testing and documentation of computer programs for the use in Computer Science and engineering technologies

H ---------

n An ability to setup an enterprise.

S -------

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

15.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I Ecosystems: Definition, Scope and Importance of ecosystem. Classification, structure and function of an ecosystem, Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids. Flow of energy, Biogeochemical cycles, Bioaccumulation, Biomagnifications, ecosystem value, services and carrying capacity, Field visit.

UNIT-II Natural Resources: Classification of Resources: Living and Non-Living resources, water resources: use and over utilization of surface and ground water, floods and droughts, Dams: benefits and problems. Mineral resources: use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources, Land resources: Forest resources, Energy resources: growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy source, case studies.

UNIT-III

Biodiversity and Biotic Resources: Introduction, Definition, genetic, species and ecosystem diversity. Value of biodiversity; consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and optional values. India as a mega diversity nation, Hot spots of biodiversity. Field visit. Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts; conservation of biodiversity: In-Situ and Ex-situ conservation. National Biodiversity act.

UNIT-IV Environmental Pollution and Control Technologies: Environmental Pollution: Classification of pollution, Air Pollution: Primary and secondary pollutants, Automobile and Industrial pollution, Ambient air quality standards. Water pollution: Sources and types of pollution, drinking water quality standards. Soil Pollution: Sources and types, Impacts of modern agriculture, degradation of soil. Noise Pollution: Sources and Health hazards, standards, Solid waste: Municipal Solid Waste management, composition and characteristics of e-Waste and its management. Pollution control technologies: Wastewater Treatment methods: Primary, secondary and Tertiary. Overview of air pollution control technologies, Concepts of bioremediation. Global Environmental Problems and Global Efforts: Climate change and impacts on human environment.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 204

Ozone depletion and Ozone depleting substances (ODS). Deforestation and desertification. International conventions / Protocols: Earth summit, Kyoto protocol and Montréal Protocol.

UNIT-V Environmental Policy, Legislation & EIA: Environmental Protection act, Legal aspects Air Act- 1981, Water Act, Forest Act, Wild life Act, Municipal solid waste management and handling rules, biomedical waste management and handling rules, hazardous waste management and handling rules. EIA: EIA structure, methods of baseline data acquisition. Overview on Impacts of air, water, biological and Socio-economical aspects. Strategies for risk assessment, Concepts of Environmental Management Plan (EMP). Towards Sustainable Future: Concept of Sustainable Development, Population and its explosion, Crazy Consumerism, Environmental Education, Urban Sprawl, Human health, Environmental Ethics, Concept of Green Building, Ecological Foot Print, Life Cycle assessment (LCA), Low carbon life style.

Text Books: 1. Benny Joseph (2005)., Environmental Studies, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing co. Ltd

2. Erach Bharucha (2005)., Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses, Hyderabad, Universities Press.

Reference Books:

1. Anji Reddy .M (2007), Textbook of Environmental Sciences and

Technology, Hyderabad, BS Publications. 2. Y Anjaneyulu.(2004), Introduction to Environmental Sciences, BS Publications.

3. Anubha Kaushik(2006).,Perspectives in Environmental Science, 3rd Edition,

New Delhi, New age international.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 205

15.8 COURSE PLAN:

Lecture Course Learning Outcomes Topics to be covered

Reference

No.

1 Summarize about environment and its Definition .Scope, importance T2:1-12

importance and need for Public Awareness.

2 Summarize about environment and Ecosystem: Definition, scope T1: 17-20

importance of ecosystems and importance of ecosystem

3 Provides information regarding ecosystem Structure and function of T1: 17-26

and applicability ecosystem

4-5 To understand how all the animals are Food chain, Food web and T1: 28-39

competing with their food requirements and pyramids

also understands the various trophic levels in

the food chain.

6 Explain the flow of energy through the Flow of energy TI: 48-57 various components of ecosystem

7 To understand the importance of nutrients and Biogeochemical cycles. T1:57-64

flow of nutrients in ecosystem

8 Explains the concept of gaseous cycles and Gaseous cycles T1:64-68

their importance in the ecosystem

9 Explains the concept of sedimentary cycles . Sedimentary cycles T2 :48-49

and their importance in the ecosystem

10 To recognize the toxicity of heavy metals on Bioaccumulation T2:51-55

the biotic and a biotic components. Explains and Biomagnifications and

the different services provided by the Values of ecosystem ecosystems

11 Distinguish about different types of natural

Energy resources: Living and T1: 76-78

resources and their applicability and Illustrate non living resources T2:59

the utility of renewable resources efficiency

12 Describe the impact of over utilization of

Water resources: use and over T1:85-88

underground and surface water utilization of surface and ground water

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 206

13 . Discuss the disaster manage mental plans Floods and Drought T1:88-90

T2:71-76

14 Describe the benefits and property dams Dams: befit and problems. T1:94-100

15 illustrate the uses of mineral resources . Mineral resources: use and T2: 86-88

exploitation

16 Enumerate the application of the solar energy

Energy resources:introduction

T2:101-106

in modern ways and importance

Solar energy and its application

T2:108-124

17 Describe the solar collectors Solar collectors T2:124-

138

18 Enumerate the application of the wind energy Wind energy and its

T2:139-150

in modern ways application.

19 Discuss the merits and limitation of wind

Merits and demerits of wind

T2:151-156

energy energy

20 Enumerate the application of the wind energy Biomass and its application

T2:158-161

in modern ways

21 Illustrate the definition and importance of Biodiversity and Biotic

T2:162-166

biodiversity resources: introduction and definition.

22 Explain the genetic diversity, species and

Classification of biodiversity

T2:176-182

ecosystem diversity and National biodiversity act.

23 Describe the ecological values and Values of biodiversity T1:254-

256 consumptive values of ecosystem

24 Provides information regarding indirect value

Indirect values of biodiversity.

T1:257-262

of biodiversity T1:288-

289

25 Discuss the hot spot center in and around the Hot spots of biodiversity.

T2:187-192

country

26 Provides information regarding different Threats to biodiversity

T2:192-205

causes for loss of biodiversity

27 Analyze various reasons for conflict of Man wild life conflict R1:179-

189 species

28 Illustrate different methods to protect Conservation of biodiversity

R1:204-216

biodiversity, Prevent pollution R3-213-

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 207

214

29 Explain the meaning of environmental Environmental pollution: T1:257

pollution and classification. introductionand classification.

30 Describe the natural and manmade pollutant Air pollution: primary T1

that causes air pollution pollutants sources and effects

Discuss the secondary pollutant source and

Secondary pollutants source T2

effects. and effects

32 Illustrate the automobile pollution. Automobile and industrial T2

pollution

33 To understand the permissible levels of Air quality standards R1 pollutant.

34 Explain the sources and effects of water Water pollution: sources of T2

pollution water pollution

35 Enumerate the different types of water Types of water pollution. T1 pollutants.

36 Distinguish the sources and types of water Soil pollution: sources and T2

pollution types of soil pollution

37 To understand modern agriculture practices

Impact of modern agriculture on T1

soil

38 To activities to degrade the soil Degradation of soil, T1

39 To identify the sources and health hazard

Noise pollution: sources and T2

health hazards

40 To have introduction noise quality Noise quality standards T1

permissible levels

41 Explain the various methods commonly

Solid waste: Municipal solid T2

employed for the disposal of solid waste. waste management

42 To understand the recent trends in e-waste

E-waste: characteristics and its T1

Management practices. management

43 Suggest various remedial and control

Pollution control technologies: T2

measures to minimize water pollution

wastewater treatment methods

44 To understand the recent trends in bio Concept of bioremediation T1

remediation

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 208

45 To understand concept of climate change and Global environmental T1

Impacts. problems: climate change and

impact on human

46 Describe the remedial measures of ozone Ozone depletion and T2

Depletion. consequences.

47 To evolve strategies to environmental issues. International protocols T1

48 Describe the role of government and legal Environmental policy, T2

aspects in environmental protection legislation and EIA

49 Discuss the salient features of the air and

Air pollution and prevention T1

water pollution act act, Water pollution and prevention act.

50 Summarize different acts in protecting Municipal solid waste T2

environment and management and handling rules,

Biomedical waste management

and handling rules

51 Discuss the salient features of the hazardous

Hazardous waste management T1

waste management and handling rules.

52 To understand the importance of eia for Eia structure T2 developmental activities.

53 Discuss the various data collection methods. Methods of baseline data T1

acquisition

SESSION PLANNER

Unit No.

L. No.

Topic

Session Objectives (Minimum

Two sessions

Objectives indicating the blooms level per session)

Text Boo

k

Teaching methodol

ogy

Date

Remarks

Planned

Conducted

UNIT-1

L1

Introduction

1.students can tell about environmen

T1 chalk & Talk

9/1/16

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 209

t. 2.student can list types of ecosystem.

L2

Scope & importance of ecosystem

1.student can define Environment. 2.student can relate to pollution.

T1 chalk & Talk

10/1/16

L3

Classification, structure and function of an ecosystem

1. Student can Define terminologies. 2. Student can identify the components of ecosystem.

T1 chalk & Talk

L4 Food chains, food web

1. Student Can define terminologies. 2.student can relate among mentioned.

T1,T2

chalk & Talk,PPT Video (5 Min)

L5 ecological pyramids

1.student can define types of pyramids. 2.student can compare between pyramids

T1,T2

chalk & Talk,PPT Video (5 Min)

L6 Flow of energy 1.student can relate to food chain.

T1,R1

chalk & Talk,PPT

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 210

2.student can apply

knowledge of food web.

L7 Biogeochemical cycles

1.student can distinguish between cycles. 2.student can tell about cycles.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT Video (5 Min)

L8 Bioaccumulation, Bio magnification

1.Student will be able to define these terminologies. 2.Student will be able to recommen

d organic farming.

T1 chalk & Talk

L9 ecosystem value, services

1.Student will be able to describe values of ecosystem. 2.Student will be able to justify services of ecosystem.

T1 chalk & Talk

L10

Carrying capacity.

1.Student will be able to define carrying capacity. 2.Student will be able to discuss

T1 chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 211

carrying capacity o an ecosystem.

UNIT-2

L11

Classification of Resources

1.Student will be able to classify natural resources. 2.Student will be able to write about types of resources.

T1 chalk & Talk

L12

water resources use and over utilization of surface and ground water,

1.Student will be able to write about misuse of resource. 2.Student will be able to know importanc

e of water resource.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L13

floods and droughts, Dams: benefits and problems.

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e of dams. 2.Student will be able to imagine problems related to floods & drought.

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L14

Mineral resources use and exploitation, environmental

1.Student will be able to write about mining.

T1 chalk & Talk Video

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 212

effects of extracting and using mineral resources

2.Student will be able to predict affects of mining.

(5 Min)

L15

Land resources:

1.Student will be able to state about Land resources. 2.Student will be able to describe Land degradation.

T1 chalk & Talk

L16

Forest resources

1.Student will be able to state about Forest resources. 2.Student will be able to describe deforestration affects.

T1 chalk & Talk

L17

Energy resources: growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources

1.Student will be able to classify energy resources. 2.Student will be able to compare between types of energy resources.

T1,T2

chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L18

use of alternate energy source

1.Student will be able to state alternate energy.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 213

2.Student will be able to recommen

d for future use.

L19

case studies. 1.Student will be able to relate to resource utilization. 2.Student will be able to summarize natural resources.

T1 chalk & Talk

UNIT-3

L20

Biodiversity and Biotic Resources

1.Student will be able to define biodiversity. 2.Student will be able to list out types of biodiversity.

T1 chalk & Talk

L21

Definition, genetic, species and ecosystem diversity.

1. Student will be able to define all mentioned terminologies. 2.Student will be able to classiy types of diversity.

T1 chalk & Talk

L22

Value of biodiversity,

1.Student will be able to discuss value of

T1 chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 214

biodiversity. 2.Student will be able to categorize it into various aspects of nature.

L23

consumptive use, productive use

1.Student will be able to illustrate values of biodiversity. 2.Student will be able to know its

importanc

e.

T1 chalk & Talk

L24

social, ethical, aesthetic and optional values.

1.Student will be able to illustrate values of biodiversity. 2.Student will be able to know its importanc

e.

T1 chalk & Talk

L25

India as a mega diversity nation

1. Student will be able to list out Species found in our country. 2. Student will be able to judge Position of India with

T1 chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 215

respect to biodiversity.

L26

Hot spots of biodiversity

1. Student will be able to illustrate Hot spots. 2. Student will be able to discover Hotspots of our country.

T1 chalk & Talk

L27

Threats to biodiversity,habitat loss, poaching of wildlife

1. Student will be able to list out various Threats to wildlife. 2. Student will be able to analyze Threats to biodiversity.

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L28

man-wildlife conflicts

1.Student will be able to report conflicts between man & wildlife. 2.Student will be able to recommen

d measures to minimize conflicts.

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L29

conservation of biodiversity-Insitu & Exsitu

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e

T1 chalk & Talk Video

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 216

conservation 2. Student will be able to justify need for conservation.

(5 Min)

L30

National Biodiversity act.

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e of this Act. 2.Student will be able to write about biodiversity Act.

T1,T2

chalk & Talk

UNIT-4

L31

Classification of pollution, Primary and secondary pollutants

1.Student will be able to classify pollutants. 2.Student will be able to write about biodegradable & non biodegradable pollutants.

T1,T2

chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L32

Automobile and Industrial pollution, Ambient air quality standards.

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e of air quality monitoring. 2.Student will be able

T1,T2

chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 217

to compare data from different parts of cities.

L33

Water pollution, Sources, types, drinking water quality standards

1.Student will be able to recommen

d

mitigation measures. 2.Student will be able to report about water pollution of any specified area.

T1,R1

chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L34

Soil Pollution, Sources and types, Impacts of modern agriculture,

1.Student will be able to define Soil Pollution. 2.Student will be able to recommen

d mitigation measures.

T1,R1

chalk & Talk

L35

Noise Pollution, Sources and Health hazards, standards

1.Student will be able to define

noise Pollution. 2.Student will be able to

recommen

d mitigation measures.

T1 chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 218

L36

Municipal Solid Waste management, composition and characteristics, e-Waste and its management.

1.Student will be able to Explain MSW. 2.Student will be able to know importanc

e of e-waste management.

T1 chalk & Talk

L37

Wastewater Treatment methods: Primary, secondary andTertiary

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e of wastewater treatment. 2.Student will be able to justify mitigation measure.

T1 chalk & Talk

L38

Overview of air pollution control technologies, Concepts of bioremediation

1.Student will be able to recommen

d

mitigation measures. 2.Student will be able to explain

bioremediation

T1,T2

chalk & Talk

L39

Climate change and impacts on human environment. Ozone depletion, Ozone depleting

1.Student will be able to list out Ozone depleting substances 2. Student will be able to imagine

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 219

substances affects of climate change.

L40

Earth summit, Kyoto protocol and Montréal Protocol

1. Student will be able to Explain Protocols 2. Student will be able to

summerize

conclusions on protocols.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

UNIT-5

L41

Environmental Protection act

1.Student will be able to Explain EPA. 2.Student will be able to justify need for Environmental Protection .

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L42

Air Act, Water Act

1.Student will be able to Explain Air & water Act. 2.Student will be able to justify need for stringent Acts.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L43

Forest Act, Wild life Act

1.Student will be able to Explain

FCA & Wildlife Act.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 220

2.Student will be able to choose a better mitigation measure.

L44

Municipal solid waste management and handling rules

1.Student will be able to Explain MSW management. 2.Student will be able to choose a better mitigation measure.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L45

biomedical waste management and handling rules

1.Student will be able to Explain

EPA. 2.Student will be able to choose a better mitigation measure.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L46

hazardous waste management and handling rules.

1.Student will be able to Explain hazardous waste management and handling rules . 2.Student will be able to choose a better mitigation measure.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L4 EIA structure, 1.Student T1,R

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 221

7 methods of baseline data acquisition

will be able to state about EIA. 2.Student will be able to summarize baseline data.

1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L48

Overview on Impacts of air, water, biological and Socio-economical aspects. Strategies for risk assessment,

1.Student will be able to contrast beween impacts. 2.Student will be able to predict

impact of project on environmental components.

T1,R1

chalk & Talk

L49

Concept of Sustainable Development

1.student will be able to State the aim and objectives of sustainable development.

2.Student will be able to know its importance.

T1,T2

chalk & Talk, Video (5 Min)

L50

Population and its explosion

1.Student will be able to theorize about population. 2.Student will be able

T1,R1

chalk & Talk

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 222

to recommen

d control measures.

L51

Crazy Consumerism, Urban Sprawl

1.Student will be able to describe consumerism. 2.Student will be able to imagine affects of urban sprawl.

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L52

Environmental Education, Concept of Green Building

1.Student will be able to know importanc

e of Environmental Education. 2.Student will be able to illustrate green building concept.

T1 chalk & Talk Video (5 Min)

L53

Ecological Foot Print,

1.Student will be able to discuss

about Ecological Foot Print. 2.Student will be able to justify by using data available.

T1 chalk & Talk,PPT

L54

Life Cycle assessment

1.Student will be able

T1,T2

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 223

(LCA), Low carbon life style.

to define LCA. 2.Student will be able to state about carbon lifestyle.

chalk & Talk

15.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Objectives Course Outcomes

a b c d I II III IV V VI

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

15.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcomes

Program Outcomes

a b C d e f g h i j k l m N

I S H S H S S

II H

III H S S

IV H

V S H

VI S H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

15.11 OBJECTIVE BITS

UNIT I

1.Who coined the term “Ecosystem”?

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 224

A) Darwin B) Tansley C) Aristotle D) Earnest hacekel Answer (B) 2.Who coined the term “Ecology”?

A) Darwin B) Tansley C) Earnest hacekel D) Robert Koch Answer (C) 3. Primary consumers in an ecosystem are also called A) Carnivores B) Omnivores C) Decomposers D) Herbivores Answer (D) 3. A net work of food chains which are interconnected in an ecosystem are called A) Food web B) Ecological niche C) Biosphere D) All ofthe above Answer (A) 5. What is the relation between gross primary productivity and net primary productivity

in an ecosystem?

A)P

N= PGR B) P

N=R/PG

C) PN= PG-R D) P

N=PG/R Answer (C)

6. Which ecological pyramid is always upright

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 225

a) Pyramid of biomass b) Pyramid of number c) Pyramid of energy d) Pyramid of number and biomass Answer (C) 7. What is the percentage of Oxygen in atmosphere?

A) 21% B) 25% C) 32% D) 35% Answer (A)

8. Habitat is a ______

a) reserve for water b) reserve for species c) living place for species d) all the above Answer (D) 9. The body temperate of human is:

a)16 c b)21 c )37 c d)98.4 c Answer (c) 10) The science of systems of control in an ecosystem is known as

a) Syncology b) Cybernetics c) biocoenoses d) None of the above Answer (B)

11. What is “SNA”? A) Scientific natural academy B) System of national accounts C) system of navy academy D) None of the above

Answer (B)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 226

12. Which of the following is a salt water or marine fish?

A)Blue gill B) Channel fish C) Tuna

D) White fish Answer (c)

13. Where can we find tropical evergreen forests in India?

A)Kerala B) Rajasthan C) Madhya Pradesh

D) Utter Pradesh Answer (A)

14. Who discovered the nitro glycerine?

A)Newton B) Faraday C) Alfred nobel D) C.V.Raman Answer (c)

15. The word population is derived from the language

A)English B) French C) Russian D) Latin Answer (D)

16. A world wide process which includes the internationalization of communication ,

trade and economic organization is called

A)Green revolution B) Global warming C) Globalization D) Blue revolution Answer (c)

17. Who started Chipko movement?

A)Indhira Gandhi B) Medha patkar C) Mahatma Gandhi D) Sunderlal Bahuguna Answer (d)

18.Most stable ecosystem is

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 227

A.Ocean B.Pond C.River D.Esturine

Answer (A) 19.Richness of ozone present in

A.Stratosphere B.Ionosphere C.Mesosphere D. Troposphere Answer (A) 20.Example for decomposers

A.Algae B.Fungi C.Bacteria D.All of the above Answer (D) UNIT II 1. -------------------%of rain water can be stored in dams of Indian

(a)43 (b) 55 (c)10 (d)18 Answer (D)

2. The mineral “galena : is a source of:

a)lead b)lithium c)nickel d)gold Answer (A) 3. The ore “HAEMATITE “gives which metal?

a)iron b) Aluminum c)copper d)manganese Answer (A) 4. The ore “bauxite” gives which metal?

a)iron b) Aluminum

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 228

c)copper d)manganese Answer (B) 5. The ore ‘pitch blende’ gives the metal: a)uranium b)thorium c)strontium d)cobalt Answer (A) 6. Which of following is not a heavy metal?

a)lead b)mercury c)copper d) Aluminum Answer (D) 7. Which of following the’ noble’ metal?

a)gold b)silver c)platinum d)copper Answer (D) 8. India has the world largest share of which of the following

a) Manganese b) copper c) diamond d) mica Answer (A) 9. Chipko movement was started to conserve

a) Forest b) grass land c) deserts d) soil Answer (A) 10. Soil conservation is a processes in which

a) Soil is aerated

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 229

b) Soil is protected from loss c) Sterile soil is made fertile d) Soil erosion is allowed Answer (B) 11. Increasing industrialization is causing much danger to man’s life by

a) Polluting the environment b) Producing more goods c) Providing more jobs d) Utilizing waste land Answer (A) 12. Cauvery water dispute is between ____ states a) India and Pakisthan b) Punjab & Haryana c) Uttar Pradesh & Madhya Pradesh d) Karnataka & Tamilnaidu Answer (D) 13. India has classified into ____ number of Biogeographically zones

a) 15 b) 10 c) 25 d) 40 Answer (B)

14. Which of the following mainly composed of methane with small quantities of propane

and ethane?

A)Natural gas B) Biogas C) Synthetic gas D) None of the above

Answer (A)

15. Which of the following is a non renewable energy resource? A)Water B) Wild life C) Coal and oil

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 230

D) All of the above Answer (C) 16) The main purpose of dam construction is

a) Irrigation b) flood control c) hydroelectricity d) Provide water to industry

Answer (C) 17. Who is considered as the father of nuclear power development in India? [ ]

A) C.V.Raman B) Homi Bhaba C) Jemshedji Tata D) all of the above Answer (B) 18. Nitrogen oxide and hydrocarbons released by automobiles interact to form

a) carbon monoxide b) sulphur dioxide c) PAN

d) aerosols Answer (C)

19. Disease caused by eating fish inhabiting mercury contaminated water is

a) Bright’s disease b) Minimata disease c) Hashimito disease d) none Answer (B)

20.Wind energy is

A.Kynetic energy B .Mechanical energy C.Kynetic energy and Mechanical energy D.Nonebof the above

Answer (B) UNIT III 1 The concept of biodiversity hot spots is given by

a) F.P.ODUM b) Normen myers c) James lovelock

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 231

d) Rachel Larson Answer (B) 2. Water-logging and soil salinity are the outcomes of

a) Over irrigation b) mining c) soil erosion d) acid rain

Answer (A) 3. Which of the following is an in-situ tiger saves in India?

a) Dudhwa b) Gulf of Myanmar c) Western Ghats d) Agasthyamalai Answer (A) 4. The supply of usable, good quality water be increased by

a) Chlorination b) Use of aquatic macrophytes c) cloud seeding d) activated sludge process

Answer (C) 5. Corbett national park , naintal is located in which of the following state?

A) Madhya Pradesh B) Utter Pradesh C) Arunachal Pradesh D) Gujarath Answer (B)

6. Anti-malarial drug quinine is extract from which the following plant

a) Neem b) Cinchona bark c) Eucalyptus d) Pine

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 232

Answer (B)

7) Which of the following is an in-situ tiger saves in India?

a) Dudhwa b) Gulf of Manner c) Western Ghats d) Agasthyamalai

Answer (B) 8) Which of the following is an example of ex-situ conservation?

a) Biosphere reserve b) gene bank c) sanctuary d) all of these.

Answer (B) 9) Which of the following is an extinct species?

a)dugong b)peacock c)dodo d)red panda

Answer (c) 10) Western Ghats are very rich in endemic species of

a) Birds b) lions c)amphibians d) turtles.

Answer (c) 11) Kaziranga national park is famous for

a) one horned rhino b) duck c)tiger d)elephant.

Answer (c) 12) Vinblastin and vincristine have been obtained from

a)periwinkle b)cinchona c)bacterium d)jelly fish.

Answer A)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 233

13) Globally hotspots present in number of

a) 25 b)34 c)24 d)12

Answer (B) 14. Which of the following on inhalation dissolves in the blood hemoglobin more

rapidly than oxygen

a) sulphur dioxide b) ozone c) carbon monoxide d) nitrous oxide

Answer (B) 15. Variation of genes with in the same species is

A.Genetic B.Species C.Ecosystems D.none of the above Answer (A) 16.World car free day is...........

A.SEP 12 B.SEP22 C.SEP24 D.SEP26 Answer (B) 18Earth day is ......

A.APRIL 2 B.APRIL 20 C.APRIL 24 D.APRIL 22 Answer (C) 19. Specifications of surface drainage for reclamation of wastelands are

a) 30 – 45 m Deep b) 50 m Deep c) 10 – 15 m Deep d) None of the above Answer (A)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 234

20. Which of the following is NOT a primary contributor to the greenhouse effect? a. Carbon dioxide b.carbon monoxide c.chlorofluorocarbons d.methane gas

Answer (b)

UNIT IV 1. Which important green house gas other than methane is being provided from the

agricultural fields?

a) So2

b) Nitrous Oxide c) So

3

d) Ammonia Answer (B) 2. Which one of the following gases can deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere?

a) Methane b) Ammonia c) Carbon dioxide d) Sulphur dioxide Answer (A) 3. The atmosphere of big cities is mostly polluted by

a) Household waste b) Radioactive fall out c) Automobile exhausts d) pesticides Answer (C) 4. Gas leaked in Bhopal Gas tragedy was

a) Pottassium iso thio cynate b) Sodium isothiocynate c) Chloroflouro carbon d) smog Answer (A) 5. Taj Mahal at Agra may be damaged by

a) Ozone depletion b) Acid rain

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 235

c) CO2 Pollution

d) CO pollution Answer (B)

6. In the 20th

Century, the global mean temperature has increased by about

a) 0.9 0C

b) 0.6 0C

c) 0.8 0C

d) 1.0 0C

Answer (B) 7. Bod means

(a)Biochemical 0zone demand (b) biological oxygen demand (c) bacterial oxygen demand (d) biosphere oxygen demand Answer (B) 8. Permitted level of noise according to environmental pollution act is

(a)125d (b) 150d (c) 200d (d) 500d Answer (A) 9. Lead pollution is mainly due to

(a)Power plants (b) oil spills (c) vehicles (d) coal firing Answer (C)

10. Noise is measured in

(a)Decibels (b) watts (c) vars (d) cm Answer (A)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 236

11. ---------------- gas is present in high percentage in air

(a)Nitrogen (b) oxygen (c) ozone (d) organ Answer (A) 12. Ozone is used as

(a)Acidic (b) base (c) sterilization agent (d) pesticides Answer (C) 13. Lead pollution is mainly due to

(a)Power plants (b) oil spills (c) vehicles (d) coal firing Answer (C) 14. Ozone layer is formed by the action of sunlight

(a)No2

(b) co2

(c) co (d) o

2 Answer (D) 15. Is primary pollutant

(a) H2 S04

( b ) H N03

( c ) H2 C03

( d ) C02

Answer (D) 16. What is Smog?

A) Smoke + O2

B) Smoke+ Flame C) Smoke + Fog D) Smoke+ Cl Answer (C)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 237

17) The main discharge from a Thermal Power plant is a) smog b) Particulates c) fly ash d) smoke Answer (C) 18) Fluorosis results in

a) exostosis b) increased bone mass c) increased Trabecular bone volume d) all of the above Answer (D) 19) More Scientific method than BOD to determine water quality parameter

a) COD b) DO c) Both of the above d) None of the above

Answer (A)

20). The atmosphere of big cities is mostly polluted by [ ]

a) Household waste b) Radioactive fall out c) Automobile exhausts d) pesticides

Answer (C)

UNIT V 1. Elements of EIA includes

a)Proposal & Exclusion b)Exclusion & Environmental assessment c)Proposal, Scoping & Environmental assessment d)All of the above Answer (D)

2) Widely recognised deficiencies of EIA practice include

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 238

a)Technical shortcomings b)Procedural limitations c)structural issues d)All the above Answer (D)

3) Which one of the following pairs is NOT correctly matched

a)Wildlife Protection Act & 1972 b)Water Preservation Act & 1977 c)Ganga Action Plan & 1981 d)Environment Protection Act & 1986 Answer (b)

4) Which of the following, the major cause of infant mortality worldwide is a)starvation b)water borne disease c)toxic chemicals d)nuclear radiation Answer (b)

5) Which material accounts for the greatest percentage of the weight of solid waste? a)food waste b)plastic c)paper d)yard waste Answer (C)

6) Typical modern municipal landfills contain which of the following? [D ] a)monitoring wells b)impermeable barriers c)methane retrieval systems d)all of the above Answer (D)

7) Which of the following is NOT a primary contributor to the greenhouse effect?

[ C]

a)carbon dioxide

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 239

b)carbon monoxide c)chlorofluorocarbons d)methane gas Answer (C)

8) Acid rain is formed due to contribution from the following pair of gases a)Methane and ozone b)Oxygen and nitrous oxide c)methane and sulphur dioxide d)Carbon dioxide and sulphur dioxide Answer (b)

10) The National Population Policy of India has set the following goals except : [A ] a)To bring down Total Fertility Rate (TFR) to replacement levels by 2015 b)To reduce the Infant Mortality Rate to 30 per l000 live births c)To reduce the Maternal Mortality Rate to 100 per 100000 live births d)100 percent registration of births, deaths, marriages and pregnancies Answer (A)

11. The responsible body for the Environmental Impact Assessment is the

a) SPCB b) CPCB c) NGO d) none of these Answer (b)

12.Gazette notification on EIA is issued by

a) Minisry of Human Resources Develpoment

b) Minisry of Environment & Forest

c) Minisry of Finance

d) Minisry of Urban Development

Answer (b)

13.EIA helps to a) achieve sustainable development b) reap environmental benefits without degradation

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 240

c) maintain balance between population &resources d) all of the above Answer (d)

14. One example of irreversible impact is a) deforestation of land b) loss of endangered species c) chage in land scape d) loss of soil fertility Answer (b)

15.CRZ stand for………….

a) coastal regulatory zone

b) code related to zonal

c) central Regional Zone

d) none of these

Answer (a)

16.study of various atmospheric parameters are

a)geology

b)hydrology

c)meteorology

d) ecology

Answer (c)

17.Rain water harvesting helps in

a)reduce run off

b)ground water recharge

c) reduce water pollution

d)all of these

Answer (d)

18.which of the following sequence in EIA are in correct order?

a) scoping- prediction- identification-evaluation

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 241

b) screening- scoping - - identification- prediction

c) scoping- evaluation- prediction- mitigation

d) screening- scoping-mitigation- evaluation

Answer (b

19. Which of the following is NOT a primary aspect of greenbelt development?

a) Incrase soil fertility

b) reduce O2 level

c) reduce co2 level

d) Incrase green cover area

Answer (b)

20.GIS stand for….

a) geographical information system

b) geological information system

c) global information system

d) none of these

Answer (a)

15.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain the significance of preserving balance in various kinds of Ecosystems. Illustrate with examples.

Knowledge a

2 Discuss the salient features of forest ecosystem. Knowledge a 3 Explain the nutrient cycles. Analysis a

4 Define eco system? Explain the scope & importance of ecosystems.

comprehension b

5 Describe the structure and functions of an ecosystem. comprehension a

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 242

6 Describe five ecosystems goods and services that human benefits from.

Knowledge a

7 Discuss the structure and function of desert ecosystem Knowledge a 8 Explain phosphate and sulphate cycles. Analysis a 9 Explain briefly about indicators of the quality of ecosystem Analysis a 10 Explain nitrogen and carboncycles. Knowledge b

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain the effects due to over usage ground water ? Knowledge B 2 Enumerate the non renewable energy resources. Knowledge A

3 Discuss the major environmental effects of mineral extraction.

Analysis B

4 Describe an account of non renewable energy resources. comprehension E 5 List out the types of energy harnessed from ocean. comprehension B 6 Explain the Big dams - Benefits and problems. Knowledge A 7 List the Natural resources and write the classification of Knowledge A resources. E 8 List the alternate energy sources? Explain their present status. Analysis B

9 Define mining. Explain mining methods

various environmental

impacts of A

10 Discuss about the soil texture, structure and its composition. B

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

QUESTIONS a 1 Discuss the levels & values of biodiversity. Knowledge a

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 243

2 Define hot spots ? Discuss their salient features Knowledge a 3 List out the major threats to Biodiversity? Analysis b 4 Explain the conservation of Biodiversity comprehension a 5 Describe the endangered , endemic & extinct species comprehension a 6 Explain in-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity Knowledge a 7 Explain the threats to biodiversity Knowledge b 8 How the study of biodiversity is beneficial to human life Analysis b 9 Define biodiversity? Explain different types of biodiversity Analysis a 10 Explain endangered species of India? a

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Discuss various sources of Soil pollution. How can you prevent soil pollution.

Knowledge b

2 . Enumerate various methods for control of water pollution. Knowledge a 3 List an account of causes,effects & control of air pollution. Analysis b 4 Discribe the sourcess,effects and control of Noise pollution. comprehension e 5 Explain the sources, effects, control of noise pollution. comprehension b 6 Define environmental pollution and explain their types. Knowledge b 7 List the effects of air pollution on plants, animals and human. Knowledge b 8 Explain automobile pollution and industrial pollution. Analysis a

9 Describe National ambient air quality standards

Analysis a

10 Define water pollution .explain point and non point sources of water pollution

Knowledge b

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Discuss about environmental management plan? Knowledge b

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 244

2 Apply the base line data? Discuss the methods of base line data.

Knowledge a

3 Explain the various types of impacts. Analysis b

4 Describe the role of remote sensing and GIS in EIA Studies ?

comprehension e

5 Discuss about concept of green building. comprehension e

6 Discuss the salient features of Air Act Knowledge a

7 Discuss the salient features of Water Act Knowledge a

8 Explain environmental protection Act

Analysis b

9 List the major provisions in Forest Conservation Act 1980 Analysis b

10 Discuss the salient features of Wild life protection Act

Knowledge a

PART – B LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Explain energy flow pattern in different types of ecosystem Knowledge b

2 Discuss the major characteristics features of a river ecosystem. Knowledge e

3 List the main components of ecosystem Analysis b

4 Explain the role of producers, consumers and decomposers .

comprehension a

5 Explain the role of producers, consumers and decomposers and detritus feeders were eliminate.

comprehension b

6 Explain food chain and food web? Knowledge e

7 List the biogeochemical cycles? Explain nitrogen cycle with the help of diagram

Knowledge b

8 Define the ecological pyramids? Explain why some of these pyramids.

Analysis e

9 Explain energy flow of the ecosystem. Analysis b

10 Name all the cycles that constitute the proper functioning of an ecosystem.

Knowledge a

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 245

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 List the Natural resources and write the classification of resources.

Knowledge b

2 Explain the Big dams - Benefits and problems. Knowledge e 3 Discuss the problems of over exploitation of ground water. Analysis b 4 Explain the causes for floods. comprehension a 5 Discuss the methods of flood control. comprehension b 6 Define desertification? Knowledge e 7 Enlist different surface and ground water resources. Knowledge b 8 Differentiate soil texture and structure Analysis e 9 Define water logging? Analysis b 10 List the effects of soil pollution? Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Enumerate the biogeographical classification of India. Knowledge b

2 Define hot spots of biodiversity? Mention the three hot spots names. Knowledge e

3 List the major causes of man-wild life conflict? Analysis b

4 Define endemic species? Name some endemic species in India.

comprehension a

5 List the national wildlife sanctuaries? comprehension b 6 Define biological diversity. Knowledge e 7 Underline India as a nation of mega diversity nation? Knowledge b

8 List the different services that are contributed in various ways by biodiversity.

Analysis e

9 Explain the threats to biodiversity? Analysis b 10 Define biodiversity? Explain different types of biodiversity Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 246

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Define air pollution and describe the technologies for the control of air pollution.

Knowledge b

2 Explain primary and secondary sources of air pollution? Knowledge e

3 List the effects of air pollution on plants, animals and human beings.

Analysis b

4 Explain the methods for the control of water pollution. comprehension a 5 Explain sewage water treatment plants. comprehension b 6 Explain about ETP . Knowledge e 7 Describe National ambient air quality standards. Knowledge b 8 Detailed note about noise pollution. Analysis e 9 Discuss about protocols. Analysis b 10 Explain about ODS ,AND Imapacts. Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Discuss the salient features of Wild life protection Act Knowledge b 2 List the major municipal solid waste management rules. Knowledge e

3 Define hazardous wastes? Discuss the rules to manage and handling rules.

Analysis b

4 Discuss the various types of impacts caused by the development activities.

comprehension a

5 Explain the methodology for EIA comprehension b 6 Define EIA and explain about types of EIA Knowledge e 7 Explain about EMP. Knowledge b

8 Define population. explain the major causes of increase population.

Analysis e

9 Discuss about environmental education. Analysis b 10 Write about greenbuilding. Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 247

1 Describe five ecosystems goods and services that human benefits from.

Evaluate E

2 Discuss the structure and function of desert ecosystem Remember A 3 Explain phosphate and sulphate cycles. Understand A 4 Explain briefly about indicators of the quality of ecosystem Evaluate E 5 Explain energy flow of the ecosystem Evaluate E

6 List the biogeochemical cycles? Explain nitrogen cycle with the help of diagram.

Remember A

7 Define food chain and food web? give example . Understand A 8 Explain about pyramid of energy. Analysis B 9 Explain about pyramid of biomass. Understand B 10 Discuss about carrying capacity Analysis B

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Define biomagnifications Evaluate e 2 Define bioaccumulation Remember a 3 Enlist different surface and ground water resources. Understand a 4 Name the non renewable resources? Evaluate e 5 Define green fuels? Evaluate e 6 List the effects of soil pollution? Remember a 7 Outline the role of geo thermal energy in India? Understand a 8 Define solar cells. Analysis b 9 Define pesticides? Mention it types. Understand b 10 List the different types of natural resources Analysis b

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Differentiate between endanger and endemic species. Evaluate e 2 Define red data book? Remember a 3 Outline in situ and ex situ conservation of biodiversity? Understand a 4 List the major causes of man-wild life conflict? Evaluate e

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 248

5 List the national wildlife sanctuaries? Evaluate e 6 What does NBPGR AND NBAGR stand for? Remember a 7 List the major threats to biodiversity Understand a

8 Define endemic species? Name some endemic species in India.

Analysis b

9 Define threatened species? Understand b 10 Define bio piracy. Analysis b

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Define environmental pollution. Evaluate e 2 Define air pollution? Remember a 3 Mention the major sources of primary air pollutants. Understand a 4 List the various types of water pollution? Evaluate e 5 Mention two important controlling devices of air pollution. Evaluate e

6 List the various types of water pollution control technologies.

Remember a

7 List the main stages of treatment of domestic sewage? Understand a 8 List the chemical treatments for industrial effluents Analysis b 9 Define BOD and COD Understand b

10 Differentiate between blue baby syndrome and itai-itai Diseases Analysis b

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 List the objectives of Air pollution act. Evaluate E 2 Explain the necessity of wild life protection act. Remember A 3 Define environmental impact assessment? Understand A 4 Define Environmental Impact Assessment . Evaluate E 5 Explain the necessity of various environmental legislations. Evaluate E 6 Define green house building. Remember A 7 Define population. Understand A 8 How can we reduce the carbon level. Analysis B

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 249

9 Explain about ecological foot print. Understand B 10 Explain about life cycle assessment. Analysis B

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Explain energy flow pattern in different types of ecosystem Evaluate E

2 List the main components of ecosystem and briefly describe the components.

Remember A

3 Explain energy flow of the ecosystem. Understand A

4 Explain briefly about indicators of the quality of ecosystem.

Evaluate E

5 Explain about nutrient cycles. Evaluate E 6 Discuss the three ecological pyramids Remember A 7 Write a detailed note about carrying capacity. Understand A 8 Enumerate the ecological value services. Analysis B 9 Explain food and food web with an examples. Understand B 10 Briefly explain about biomagnifications. Analysis B

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Describe the merits and demerits of nuclear power energy Evaluate E

2 Explain the solar energy; also discuss about the solar cells with a diagram

Remember A

3 Discuss droughts and floods with respect to their occurrence and impacts. Understand A

4 Define mining. Explain major impacts due to mining.

various environmental

impacts of E

5 How can you prevent the depletion of ground water resources?

Evaluate E

6 List the alternate energy sources? Explain their present status.

Remember A

7 List the different types of energies which can be derived from ocean.

Understand A

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 250

8 Write a short note on wind energy; also discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Analysis B

9 List the importance of forest resources for economic and ecological wealth of India.

Understand B

10 Discuss about the soil texture, structure and its composition.

Analysis B

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Define biodiversity. explain the levels of biodiversity. Evaluate E 2 Explain the values of biodiversity. Remember A 3 How the study of biodiversity is beneficial to human life. Understand A 4 Explain in-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity Evaluate E

5 Discuss the status of India as a mega diversity nation of Nation.

Evaluate E

6 List the different services that are contributed in various ways by biodiversity.

Remember A

7 Explain endangered species of India? Understand A 8 Define hot spot.Explain about hotspots in India. Analysis B 9 Explain about biodiversity Act. Understand B

10 Discuss the causes of man-wild life conflicts. Suggest suitable Analysis B

wild life conservation practices.

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Explain automobile pollution and industrial pollution. Evaluate E 2 Describe National ambient air quality standards. Remember A

3 List the effects of water pollution and enumerate drinking water quality standards.

Understand A

4 Explain the methods for the control of water pollution Evaluate E

5 Define environmental pollutants and explain their types and effects.

Evaluate E

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 251

6 Define air pollution and describe the technologies for the control air pollution.

Remember A

7 Explain about earth summit and Kyoto protocol. Understand A 8 Discuss about ozone depleting substances. Analysis B 9 Describe about green house gasses Understand B

10 Define climate. Explain about climate changes and their impacts.

Analysis B

15. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Define biomedical wastes? What are the rules to manage and handle them.

Evaluate E

2 Define biomedical wastes? What are the rules to manage and handle them.

Remember A

3 Discuss the various types of impacts caused by the developmental activities with suitable examples.

Understand A

4 Explain the rules and regulations of forest act. Evaluate E 5 Explain environmental protection Act. Evaluate E 6 Explain the methodology for EIA. Remember A 7 Write a detailed note about concept of green building. Understand A 8 Explain about concept of sustainable development. Analysis B 9 Discuss major threats to population growth. Understand B 10 Enumerate earth centric views to human centric views Analysis B

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 252

16.ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND DIGITAL LOGIC LAB

16.0 Course Overview:

Introductory experimental laboratory that explores the design, construction, and debugging of analog electronic circuits. Lectures and six laboratory projects investigate the performance characteristics of diodes, transistors, JFETs, and op-amps, including the construction of a small audio amplifier and preamplifier. Seven weeks are devoted to the design and implementation and written and oral presentation of a project in an environment similar to that of engineering design teams in industry. The course provides opportunity to simulate real-world problems and solutions that involve tradeoffs and the use of engineering judgment. Engineers from local analog engineering companies come to campus to help students with their design projects. 16.1Course Objectives:

I. To teach modulation, demodulation techniques used in communication system, and develop the Modulation techniques used in both time and frequency domains. II. To impart knowledge of pre-emphasis and de-emphasis circuits used in the analog communication III. To familiarize the Signal Modulation (amplitude, frequency, and phase) and transmission techniques (base band, SSB system) will be emphasized. IV. To explain the concepts of mixer, PLL, Digital phase detector and synchronous detector to develop a clear insight into the relations between the input and output ac signals in various stages of a transmitter and a receiver of AM & FM systems Course Outcomes: 1. Students will be able to analyze signals in time and frequency domain. 2. Students will be able to identify different analog modulation schemes; analyze and solve typical problems involving analog modulation/demodulation systems. 3. Students will be able to distinguish between different pulse modulation systems, multiplexing techniques and analyse PCM systems including effects of noise. 4. Students will be able to identify different digital modulation schemes, and design corresponding modulators/demodulators. They will be able to distinguish between different

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 253

network topologies, protocols, data -flow and error control techniques, sand between synchronous and asynchronous transmission. 5. Students will be able to solve fundamental problems on entropy, information rate, source coding, coding efficiency and channel capacity SYLLABUS

PART – A

ANALOG DEVICES AND CIRCUITS 1. Characteristics of PN Junction diode 2. Characteristics of Zener diode 3. Ripple Factor and Load Regulations of Half-wave Rectifier with and without filters 4. Ripple Factor and Load Regulations of Full-wave Rectifier with and without filters 5. Input and Output characteristics of Transistor in Common Emitter configuration 6. Drain and Transfer Characteristics of Junction Field Effect Transistor (JFET) 7. Gain and Frequency response of Common Emitter Amplifier 8. Gain and Frequency response of Feedback Amplifier (Voltage series or current series) 9. Heartley and Colpitts Oscillator 10. RC phase shift Oscillator

PART – B

DIGITAL CIRCUITS

1. Realization of Logic gates using discrete components 2. Binary Adders and Subtractors 3. Comparators 4. Multiplexers 5. Decoders 6. Flip-Flops 7. Counters 8.Shift Registers Note: Any 12 of above experiments and from each part 6 experiments are to be conducted.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 254

2.LAB SCHEDULE

Subject: ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND DIGITAL LOGIC LAB

Exp. No. Date Planned to

complete Date Conducted Remarks

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

VII

VIII

XI

X

XI

XII

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 255

JAVA PROGRAMMING LAB

Document No:

MLRIT/IT/LAB MANUAL/Java

programming VERSION 1.2

Date of Issue

28-05-2017

Date of Revision

28-06-2017

Compiled by

Mr.K. Hemanath

Verified by

Dr. K.SRINIVAS RAO

Authorized by

HOD(IT)

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 256

JAVA PROGRAMMING LAB

OBJECTIVES: To teach the students basics of JAVA programs and its execution To teach the students the differences between C++ and JAVA programming To make the students learn concepts like packages and interfaces To make the students understand life cycle of the applets and its functionality To make the students understand the usage until package To teach the student, to develop java programs using interfaces

Recommended System/Software Requirements:

Intel based desktop PC with minimum of 2.6GHZ or faster processor with at least 256 MB RAM and 40 GB free disk space.

Operating system: Flavor of any WINDOWS Software: j2sdk1.7

Linux and MySQL

Eclipse or Netbean

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 257

INTRODUCTION TO OOP

Object-oriented programming (OOP) is a computer science term used to characterize a programming language that began development in the 1960’s. The term ‘object-oriented programming’ was originally coined by Xerox PARC to designate a computer application that describes the methodology of using objects as the foundation for computation. By the 1980’s, OOP rose to prominence as the programming language of choice, exemplified by the success of C++. Currently, OOPs such as Java, J2EE, C++, C#, Visual Basic.NET, Python and JavaScript are popular OOP programming languages that any career-oriented Software Engineer or developer should be familiar with.

OOP is widely accepted as being far more flexible than other computer programming languages. OOPs use three basic concepts as the fundamentals for the programming language: classes, objects and methods. Additionally, Inheritance, Abstraction, Polymorphism, Event Handling and Encapsulation are also significant concepts within object-oriented programming languages that are explained in online tutorials describing the functionality of each concept in detail.

The Java platform is undoubtedly fast moving and comprehensive. Its many application programming interfaces (APIs) provide a wealth of functionality for all aspects of application and system-level programming. Real-world developers never use one or two APIs to solve a problem, but bring together key functionality spanning a number of APIs. Knowing which APIs you need, which parts of which APIs you need, and how the APIs work together to create the best solution can be a daunting task.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 258

LAB CODE

1. Students should report to the concerned lab as per the time table.

2. Students who turn up late to the labs will in no case be permitted to do the program schedule for the day.

3. After completion of the program, certification of the concerned staff in-charge in the

observation book is necessary. 4. Student should bring a notebook of 100 pages and should enter the readings

/observations into the notebook while performing the experiment. 5. The record of observations along with the detailed experimental procedure of the

experiment in the immediate last session should be submitted and certified staff member in-charge.

6. Not more than 3-students in a group are permitted to perform the experiment on the

set. 7. The group-wise division made in the beginning should be adhered to and no mix up

of students among different groups will be permitted. 8. The components required pertaining to the experiment should be collected from

stores in-charge after duly filling in the requisition form. 9. When the experiment is completed, should disconnect the setup made by them, and

should return all the components/instruments taken for the purpose.

10. Any damage of the equipment or burn-out components will be viewed seriously either by putting penalty or by dismissing the total group of students from the lab for the semester/year.

11. Students should be present in the labs for total scheduled duration. 12. Students are required to prepare thoroughly to perform the experiment before coming

to laboratory. 13. Procedure sheets/data sheets provided to the student’s groups should be maintained

neatly and to be returned after the experiment.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 259

INDEX

S.n

o.

Week

no:

Name of the experiment

1 Installation of Java software 2 1 a) Write a Java program that prints all real solutions to the quadratic

equation ax2 + bx + c = 0. Read in a, b, c and use the quadratic formula. If the discriminate b2-4ac is negative, display a message stating that there are no real solutions.

b) The Fibonacci sequence is defined by the following rule: The first two values in the sequence are 1 and 1. Every subsequent

value is the sum of the two values preceding it. Write a Java program that uses both recursive and non recursive functions to print the nth value in the Fibonacci sequence.

3 2 a) Write a Java program that prompts the user for an integer and then prints out all prime numbers up to that integer. (use Scanner class to read input)

b) Write a Java program to multiply two given matrices. c) Write a Java Program that reads a line of integers, and then displays

each integer, and the sum of all the integers (Use String Tokenizer class of java.util)

4 3 a) Write a Java program that checks whether a given string is a palindrome or not. Ex: MADAM is a palindrome.

b) Write a Java program for sorting list of names. Read input from command line.

c) Write a Java program to make frequency count of words in a given text.

5 4 a) Write a Java program to create a Student class with following fields i. Hall ticket number ii. Student Name iii. Department Create ‘n’ number of Student objects where ‘n’ value is passed as

input to constructor. b) Write a Java program to demonstrate String comparison using == and

equals method. 6 5 a) Write a java program to create an abstract class named Shape that

contains an empty method named number Of Sides( ).Provide three classes named Trapezoid, Triangle and Hexagon such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the classes contains only the method number Of Sides ( ) that shows the number of sides in the given geometrical figures.

b) Suppose that a table named Table.txt is stored in a text file. The first line in the file is the header, and the remaining lines correspond to rows in the table. The elements are separated by commas. Write a java

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 260

program to display the table using JTable component. 7 6 a) Write a Java program to read copy content of one file to other by

handling all file related exceptions. 8 7 a) Write a Java program that reads a file name from the user, and then

displays information about whether the file exists, whether the file is readable, whether the file is writable, the type of file and the length of the file in bytes.

b) Write a Java program that reads a file and displays the file on the screen, with a line number before each line.

c) Write a Java program that displays the number of characters, lines and words in a text file.

9 8 a) Write a Java program that creates three threads. First thread displays “Good Morning” every one second, the second thread displays “Hello” every two seconds and the third thread displays “Welcome” every three seconds.

b) Write a Java program that correctly implements producer consumer problem using the concept of inter thread communication.

10 9 a) Write a Java program that works as a simple calculator. Use a grid layout to arrange buttons for the digits and for the +, -,*, % operations. Add a text field to display the result.

11 10 a. Write a Java program for handling mouse events. b. Write a Java program for handling key events using Adapter classes

12 11 a) Write a java program that simulates a traffic light. The program lets the user select one of three lights: red, yellow, or green. When a radio button is selected, the light is turned on, and only one light can be on at a time No light is on when the program starts.

b) Write a Java program that allows the user to draw lines, rectangles and ovals

13 12 a) Develop simple calculator using Swings. b) Develop an applet that displays a simple message in center of the screen.

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 261

Dept. of IT HAND BOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 262